JP7184832B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

A conventional game machine can execute a battle production and a timer production at the same time as a ready-to-win production, and during the battle production, it is possible to further execute a slow motion production that slows down the playback speed of the battle production. There is a thing (for example, see patent document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801

However, in Patent Document 1, if the reproduction speed of the battle effect is slowed down as the slow motion effect, the progress speed of the timer effect is also slowed down, which causes the player to feel uncomfortable. be.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from feeling uncomfortable.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium according to a player's operation;
sound output means;
display means;
light emitting means;
and a production execution means capable of executing production,
The light emitting means includes specific light emitting means and predetermined light emitting means,
The display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area,
The production executing means is
A specific effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
Guidance display that uses image display to urge the player to shoot a game medium toward the second area of the first area and the second area;
guidance light emission to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area by moving the light emission location of the specific light emission means;
The specific production is
A production animation is displayed on the display means, a production sound is output by the sound output means, and the predetermined light emission means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period, in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is notified as a result of the production. configured,
The production executing means is
The effect moving image can be displayed in the first display area,
In the second display area, it is possible to display information display related to the game,
In the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed in the first display area,
In the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
In the third period,
When an advantageous mode is notified as a result of the effect, the first display area and the second display area are used without displaying the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period. It is possible to notify the effect result of the advantageous mode,
When notifying a disadvantageous aspect as the effect result, the effect result of the disadvantageous aspect is notified using the first display area while the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period is displayed. is possible and
In both the first period and the second period, the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting means can be changed, and in the second period, the predetermined light emission is performed at an interval shorter than that in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode of the means,
The mode of information display is common in the first period and the second period,
the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display;
The production executing means is
The first guide display and the second guide display are performed when the start effect related to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, and in the subsequent period, the first guide display is terminated while the second guide display is performed. Display guidance,
performing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed;
After turning off the specific light emitting means, performing the guidance light when performing the first guidance display,
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120) and
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- As shown in 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, and during the execution period of the latter half of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
moreover,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the name display of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
Continuing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is finished;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Also, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the invention according to the following means 1. A gaming machine that controls a state in which a jackpot game can be executed based on the fact that 7 symbols are stopped and displayed together in a decorative symbol display device as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-147575. is disclosed.

According to the gaming machine described above, during execution of the big win start effect, it is configured to issue a right hitting instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the right by operating the ball shooting handle. There is still room for improvement with respect to such an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

It has been devised in view of such circumstances, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing an instruction prompting a player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
The second guide display is continued in the special state after the advantageous state control is finished.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing a rotating display of a pending display in each pending display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a telop in a telop display area. , (D) are diagrams showing the flashing mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of a chance up production|presentation. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β1; FIG. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 2nd reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the characterizing part of the present embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a frame lamp. It is an explanatory diagram showing a special figure LED board and a fourth symbol unit. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a hit type table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is explanatory drawing which shows a big-hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design variation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening post-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation processing during a big hit. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during hit variation. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a big hit. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lighting mode of a lamp|ramp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from power failure during the fanfare production|presentation by special figure 1 hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure during 1 round of big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 1 big hit at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure during two rounds of big hits at the time of one special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 2 rounds of big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 3 big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of returning from power failure during the 4 big hit rounds at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of returning from power failure between the rounds after 4 big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of resetting from power failure during the jackpot final round at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of resetting from power failure during the ending production at the time of special figure 1 hit.

A mode for implementing a pachinko game machine, which is a game machine according to the present invention, will be described below based on an embodiment.

[form]
The game machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM and production sounds are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit (for example, an IC079SG132 for speech synthesis) that reproduces sound, an amplifier circuit (for example, an amplifier circuit 079SG134) that amplifies the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit, and a sound that is amplified by the amplifier circuit. and speakers (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that output sound.
According to this feature, the highly reproducible effect sound can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or form 2,
The effect executing means can output the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect by the sound output means during a predetermined period of the second period at the same speed as the first period, and In a specific period after the period, it is possible to output by the sound output means at a speed different from that in the first period (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-1, first reach effect, second reach effect, first In the first half of each reach performance second half execution period of the third reach performance and fourth reach performance, the speaker is the same as the first half of each reach performance execution period of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance. While the effect sound is output from 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4, in the latter half of each reach effect latter half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, V4. The part that outputs the effect sound at a different playback speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the playback speed V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the speed of the sound effect can be changed for a specific period of the second period in which the moving picture effect is displayed at the second speed, so that the effect of the sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be improved. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
The effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion capable of outputting BGM (music) and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production sound including the music and the sound effect.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
A light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light in at least the first period and the second period and capable of changing the light emitting mode,
The effect executing means can change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in the second period at a period shorter than that in the first period (for example, FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and As shown in 10-25, during the execution period of the second reach production second half and during the execution period of the fourth reach production latter half, execution periods of the first reach production, the second reach production, and the third reach production and the fourth The part where the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a period shorter than the execution period of the first half of the ready-to-win effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change period of the light emission mode of the light emitting means becomes shorter (faster) in the second period in which the speed of progress of the presentation is slow, so that the presentation effect in the second period can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
a predetermined effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect) in which a character effect animation is displayed in the first display area and a effect sound is output by the sound output means in accordance with the display of the character effect animation; Information production that operates information display related to variable display (for example, rotating display of the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), 2 (C) telop movement display in the telop display area 079SG005T) effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
Regarding the information effect, it is possible to execute the information effect in which the information display is operated at the same operation speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIGS. 10-19 to 10- As shown in 25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the pending display is rotated at a rotation speed of V3. , the part that displays the moving display of the telop at the moving speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the operating speed of the information display and the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect change between the first period and the second period. Since it does not change with the period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The total area of the first display region is larger than the total area of the second display region (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion larger than the combined area of the area of and the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can more easily recognize the predetermined effect than the information effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The effect executing means can execute an information effect that always operates the information display at the same operating speed during at least a period during which variable display is being performed other than the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10). -18 to FIG. 10-25, in the period other than during the ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the suspended display is executed at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspended memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspended memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop In the display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is executed at the moving speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the operation speed of the information display does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 6 to 8,
The information effect is a moving display effect (for example, moving display of a message corresponding to the game state in the telop display area 079SG005T) in which the information display suggesting the state of the effect in the variable display being executed is sequentially moved and displayed in the second display area. the part that executes
The effect executing means can execute a moving display effect for moving and displaying the information display so that at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player (for example, in FIG. 10-2(C) As shown, the characters included in the message in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time they are displayed again to the left. (the part that is moved to the right from
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since at least part of the information display is always visible to the player, the player can easily recognize that the moving display effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sounds, such as speakers 8L and 8R and voice synthesis IC079SG132, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on voice control board 13,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ) and a notification effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a deviation notification effect) for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, effect control CPU 120). ,
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
During the second period, it is possible to execute an effect rendering that is different from the predetermined rendering and is for enhancing the rendering effect of the predetermined rendering (for example, FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and FIG. As shown in 10-28, the part that executes the effect production of displaying the concentration line on the image display device 5 in the second reach production latter half execution period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, further enhance the performance effect in the second period, and allow the player to recognize by the effect performance that the second period is over and the notification performance is to be executed. can be done easily.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The production executing means is
The effect production is performed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of effect for enhancing the production effect of the predetermined production (for example, the mode in which the concentration line shown in FIG. 10-28 (C) is displayed, and the mode shown in FIG. 10-28 (D) As shown in FIG. 10-28 (C), it can be executed in a mode in which the number of displayed concentration lines is larger than that in FIG.
As the second period progresses from the start point to the end point, it is possible to execute the effect rendering in a manner in which the degree of effect of enhancing the rendering effect increases sequentially (for example, FIGS. 10-28 (C) and 1-28 ( As shown in D), the portion where the number of concentration lines displayed increases as the battle production progresses)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the mode of the effect production changes to a mode in which the degree of effect of increasing the effect of the predetermined production is sequentially increased, the execution of the notification production after the second period ends is played by the effect production. make it easier for people to recognize

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 11,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-reach effect), a notification effect for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a loss notification effect), and specific information related to variable display in the second display area. Effect (for example, the rotating display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), and the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C) Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing telop movement display),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The notification effect can be executed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), FIG. 10-31 (G), as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), when the decoration pattern stops with a combination of a big hit as a big hit notification effect, the big hit occurs in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. The part that displays the image of the notification effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incompatibility, and furthermore, by executing the notification effect in a wide display area including the first display area and the second display area, it is possible to notify that the privilege has been given. It can be easily recognized by the player.

Form 13 is the gaming machine according to Form 12,
The production executing means is
A first display that operates within the second display area (for example, a reserved display) and a second display that does not operate within the second display area (for example, a first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 079SG005U). ) can be displayed in the specific information presentation,
The notification effect can be executed in the second display area where the first display and the second display are erased (for example, FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 1-30 (D), FIG. 1-31 (G), as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), when executing the jackpot notification effect, the suspension display and the first suspension storage display area 079SG005D, the second suspension storage display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification effect is executed in the second display area in which not only the first display that operates but also the second display that does not operate are erased, so that the visibility of the notification effect in the second display area is further enhanced. be able to.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 13,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas capable of displaying effect moving images, a first display area (for example, first display area 079SG005F), a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, second display area 079SG005Sa), a display means (for example, an image display device 5) including
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a ready-to-win effect), a notification effect for notifying whether or not a privilege is awarded after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a loss notification effect), and an information effect related to variable display in the second display area. (For example, the rotating display of the suspended display in the first suspended storage display area 079SG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), or the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the movement display of
with
The display means can change the visibility of the first display area and the second display area (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, in addition to the first display area 079SG005F, the second display area A portion that can reduce the visibility of the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb),
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
In the pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, the visibility of the first display area changes but the visibility of the second display area does not change (for example, modification 079SG -2, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and the change in the visibility of the first display area in the pre-notification period allows the player to easily recognize the timing at which the notification effect is executed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation because the visibility of the second display area does not change.

Form 15 is the gaming machine according to Form 14,
The display means is means capable of generating an image to be displayed, and includes a first drawing layer (for example, second image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the first display area, and an image generation means (for example, display including a control unit 123),
The visibility of the first display area is changed by changing the visibility of the image drawn in the first drawing layer by the image generating means (for example, as shown in Modification 079SG-2, the second image data A portion that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately change only the visibility of the first display area without changing the visibility of the second display area.

Form 16 is the gaming machine according to form 15,
The image generation means adjusts the visibility of the image to be drawn in the first drawing layer from a specific position away from the area corresponding to the second display area in the first drawing layer to the area corresponding to the second display area. over a predetermined period (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of the second image data is drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa and a part that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by drawing so as to enlarge and display toward the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change in visibility of the first rendering layer changes over a predetermined period from the specific position toward the area corresponding to the second display area. The visibility of the area can be made difficult to change.

Form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 14 to 16,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute the notification effect based on the detection of the action of the player by the action detection means (for example, control to the big win game state based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, or parts that can signal that they are not controlled by the state),
An action promoting effect (for example, an operation promoting effect) that prompts a player to act by displaying an action promoting image for executing the notification effect in the first display area is executable,
Although the visibility of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect decreases, the visibility of the action promotion effect does not decrease (for example, the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the first image The part where the visibility of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as an image of data does not decrease)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the action promoting effect stand out from the predetermined effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to perform the action.

Form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect), a notification effect for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed, and an information effect for operating information display related to the variable display in the second display area (for example, FIG. 10- 2 (B) shown in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U rotating display of the reserved display, and movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C)) Possible effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
In a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, a pre-notification effect of displaying a specific still image corresponding to the stoppage of progress of the predetermined effect being executed in the first display area. (For example, still image display effect) can be executed,
The information display operation in the second display area continues even in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, the first suspension Part where rotating display of reserved display in memory display area 079SG005D and second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and moving display of telop in telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C) continue)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Furthermore, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed by displaying the specific still image in the first display area in the pre-notification period. In addition, since the information display operation in the second display area continues, it is possible to prevent the information presentation from becoming difficult to recognize due to the information display operation being stopped.

Form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The specific still image is an image obtained by changing the color of the static image of the predetermined effect whose progress has been stopped (for example, As shown, the part where the color of the still image is inverted by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific still image displayed in the first display area is different in color from the still image of the predetermined effect, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the notification effect will be executed.

Form 20 is the gaming machine according to form 19,
Regarding the image of the information effect displayed in the second display area, the color does not change in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 2, the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, but the suspended display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are displayed. The part where the color of the 4th pattern that is attached is not reversed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information effect when the pre-notification effect is executed (since the color of the image of the information effect does not change, the color does not change). It is possible to easily recognize that it is a specific still image).

Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a moving image,
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), and an effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a deviation notification effect) for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect,
with
The predetermined effect includes a first section (e.g., first reach effect and third reach effect) and a second section (e.g., second reach effect and fourth reach effect) after the first section,
Each of the first section and the second section is a first period (for example, the first half of the ready-to-reach effect first half execution period, the first half of the second ready-to-win effect part of the execution period, the first half of the third ready-to-win effect part of the executing period, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect. production first half execution period) and a second period after the first period (for example, first reach production second half execution period, second reach production second half execution period, third reach production second half execution period, fourth Reach production second half execution period) and
The production executing means is
In the first period, the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. A part in which moving images of each ready-to-win effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
During the second period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25 , the second half of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the animation of each ready-to-win effect. ),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- As shown in 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, and during the execution period of the latter half of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The predetermined effect is a first pattern that shifts to the second section after the execution of the first section (for example, variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, and FIG. Variable display of super reach β3 shown in 10-25) and a second pattern that ends without transitioning to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, super reach shown in FIGS. 10-18 and 10-19 variable display of α1 and super reach α2, and variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2 shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23).
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Further, the predetermined performance is executed at the second speed in the first section and the predetermined performance is executed without shifting to the second section or the second section is executed. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the game ends or whether or not the privilege is given by executing the predetermined performance at the second speed in the second section, the interest in the game can be improved.

Form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The production executing means is
An end suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined effect ends in the first interval without transitioning to the second interval (for example, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect) is defeated by an enemy character) can be executed,
The end-suggesting effect and the predetermined effect when transitioning from the first section to the second section can be executed at the same progress speed (for example, FIGS. 10-19, 10-20, and 10-21 , FIGS. 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the second half execution period of the first reach production and the second half execution period of the third reach production, the production in which the friendly character is knocked down by the enemy character and the first A portion where the reach performance second half execution period or the third reach performance second half execution period is executed at the progress speed V1),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect, and In the second notification period after the first notification period, the effect moving image, which is the fourth speed slower than the third speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 10-18, 10-20, and 10 -22, Figure 10-24, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 ( B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure 10-35 (C), as shown in A portion that displays a moving image when an enemy character falls down due to a hit with an attack at a progress speed of V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not given in the notification effect, the effect moving image of the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the effect moving image of the fourth speed during the second notification period. There are (for example, FIGS. -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), animation when the friendly character falls down The part where the display is executed at the progress speed V1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the progress speed of the predetermined effect when shifting to the second section is the same as the progress speed of the end suggesting effect, the progress speed when shifting to the second zone is the same as the progress speed of the end suggesting effect. By being different, it is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations for the granting of the privilege, and when it is notified that the privilege will not be granted, the fourth-speed effect moving image is not displayed. Since it is possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from becoming excessively high, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), an action-promoting effect (for example, an operation-promoting effect) that prompts the player to act, and a notification effect (for example, , jackpot notification effect and loss notification effect) and effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- As shown in 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, and during the execution period of the latter half of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
When the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is being displayed at the second speed in the second period, the action promoting effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the 4 Part where the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incompatibility, and furthermore, since the predetermined performance progresses at the second speed during execution of the action promotion performance during the second period, the performance effect of the predetermined performance can be enhanced. can.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to form 23,
The action promotion effect includes an effective detection period notification effect (for example, display of a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation succession period of the push button 31B) for notifying the effective detection period for receiving the detection of the player's action by the action detection means. ,
When the validity detection period ends, the effect execution means detects the action of the player by the action detection means within the validity detection period from the timing after the end of the validity detection period. 10-33 (E), 10-34 (E), and 10-35 (A) to 10-35 (F), the same notification effect can be executed A part that executes the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect based on the end of the operation acceptance period of the button 31B or the player's operation of the push button 31B)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, when the action detection means does not detect the action of the player, the notification effect is not executed at the timing before the valid detection period elapses, so the action detection means detects the action of the player. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the privilege is granted during the validity detection period.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), an effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that is not a big hit notification effect) for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed;
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect, and In the second notification period after the first notification period, the effect moving image, which is the fourth speed slower than the third speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 10-18, 10-20, and 10 -22, figures 10-24 and figures 10-26 (E) to figures 10-26 (G), figures 10-29 (C) to figures 10-29 (E), figures 10-30 (B) to figures 10 -30 (D), Figures 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figures 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35C), the attack of the ally character in the big hit notification effect The animation of the part where hits the enemy character is displayed at the progressing speed V1, while the animation of the part where the enemy character falls down is displayed at the progressing speed of V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not granted in the notification effect, the effect moving image of the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the effect moving image of the fourth speed during the second notification period. There are (for example, FIGS. -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), as shown in Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), moving speed The part displayed in V1)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and furthermore, when the provision of the privilege is notified as the notification performance, the performance moving image with the progress speed of the fourth speed is displayed, so that the privilege is granted. It is possible to impress the player with the performance moving image of the notification performance.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to form 25,
The effect execution means performs a special effect during the second period only when a privilege is granted (for example, a still image display effect in which the color of the still image is inverted as shown in FIGS. 10-16 (pattern SG- 2. Still image display effect))).
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special effect is executed.

The gaming machine of form 27 is the gaming machine according to form 26,
The privilege providing means provides a first privilege (for example, a non-variable big hit jackpot game state) as the privilege and a second privilege (for example, a probability variable big win big hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. is grantable and
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, a resurrection effect shown in Modification 079SG-4) for notifying that a privilege will be granted after once notifying that the privilege will not be granted in the notification effect. ,
When the special effect is executed during the second period and it is notified that the privilege is granted in the notification effect, the second privilege is granted (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-4, When the static image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 and the big hit notification effect is executed, the part controlled to the big hit game state of the probability variable big win),
When the special performance is executed during the second period and the special performance is executed after the notification performance informs that the privilege is not granted, the first privilege or the second privilege is granted. (For example, as shown in the modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 and the resurrection effect is executed after the deviation notification effect is executed, the non-probable variable jackpot Part where there is a case where it is controlled to the game state and a case where it is controlled to the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, after the special effect is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the provision of the privilege is notified by the notification effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 28 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 27,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), and a first action-promoting image (for example, an operation-promoting image 079SG005Ba) and a second action-promoting image (for example, an operation-promoting image 079SG005Bb) different from the first action-promoting image. is displayed on the display means to prompt the player's action (for example, an operation promotion effect), and whether or not the privilege is given based on the detection of the player's action by the action detection means is determined. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect to be notified (for example, a big hit notification effect and a losing notification effect);
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
After the start of the second period, the operation promotion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the operation promotion effect is executed during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect part),
When the action-promoting effect is executed by the first action-promoting image, the first action-promoting image is displayed while visibly displaying the effect moving image of the predetermined effect on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33). As shown, when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the effect image 079SG005E having transparency is also displayed, so that the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E).
When the action promoting effect is executed by the second action promoting image, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed on the display means so that the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is more difficult to see than when the first action promoting image is displayed. , displaying the second action-promoting image in a display area wider than the display area of the first action-promoting image (for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed, since the transparency of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is 0%, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed),
The rate at which the privilege is given when the second action promoting image is displayed is higher than when the first action promoting image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17, the operation promoting image 079SG005Bb The ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when is displayed is lower than the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and to make the player pay attention to whether the first action promotion image or the second action promotion image is displayed as the action promotion effect. It can improve amusement interest.

The gaming machine of form 29 is the gaming machine according to form 28,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying, on the display means, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect whose progress speed is the second speed while the first action promoting image is being displayed (for example, FIGS. 10-24, FIG. 10-25 and FIGS. 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting effect, a battle effect is displayed while the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is being displayed. The part where the display of the effect animation is executed at the progress speed V2)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, since the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed at the second speed while the first action promoting image is being displayed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 29,
The production executing means is
A first predetermined effect (for example, a first ready-to-reach effect and a third ready-to-reach effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second ready-to-reach effect and a fourth ready-to-reach effect) can be executed as the predetermined effect, and the first After the execution of the first specific section (for example, the first reach production first half execution period and the third reach production first half execution period) in the predetermined production, the second specific section after the first specific section (for example, the first reach It is possible to shift to the second half of the production execution period and the third reach production second half execution period),
The predetermined effect is a first specific pattern (for example, super reach α1 shown in FIGS. and variable display of super reach β1 shown in FIG. 10-22), and a second specific pattern (for example, , variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 and super reach β3 shown in FIGS. A third specific pattern (for example, variable display of super reach α2 shown in FIG. 10-19 or variable display of super reach β2 shown in FIG. 10-23) that ends the predetermined effect after execution of two specific sections, and is executable and
When shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and when shifting from the second specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second predetermined effect, the performance Display the effect moving image whose progress speed is the second speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , a portion for executing the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect at the progress speed V2 when shifting from the third ready-to-reach effect second half part execution period to the fourth ready-to-win effect first half part execution period),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound is output at the same speed in both the first specific section and the second specific section of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, when shifting from the first reach production first half execution period to the first reach production second half execution period, the first reach production second half execution period to the second When shifting to the first half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance, from the second half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win performance. , the BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the playback speed V4, the same as in other periods)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes when shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and when shifting from the second specific section to the second predetermined effect. However, since the output speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change when shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific effect, and when shifting from the second specific effect to the second specific effect, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and further, the player can easily recognize the branch of the predetermined effect by changing the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect to the second speed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 079SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 079SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the sound control board 13 in the feature part 079SG includes a voice synthesizing circuit board 13 for synthesizing sounds (effect sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120. An IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 for amplifying the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and a voice data ROM 079SG133 are mounted. Sound number data is output to the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 based on the performance control command to cause the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG 132 generates voices and effect sounds corresponding to the input sound number data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 079SG 134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesizing IC079SG132, and outputs them to the speakers 8L and 8R.

The sound data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting sounds corresponding to the effects executed by the effect command corresponding to the sound number data in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data are the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including voice data and the like described in chronological order.

FIG. 10-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature part 079. FIG. The display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape having a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decoration patterns, a ready-to-win effect, an operation promotion effect and a still image display effect, which will be described later. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved storage by the number of the reserved display of the white circle, and the number of the second special figure reserved storage A second display area 079SG005Sa including a second reserved storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of circular reserved displays and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state is configured.

That is, of the entire display area of the image display device 5, the portion excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

In addition, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display information related to the game (holding display, telop display, fourth symbol) at the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than the first display area 079SG005F. , and the number of reserved memories). That is, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in the characteristic portion 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

And the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, the number of first special figure pending storage, and the number of second special figure pending storage. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5 . The third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and lateral width are formed extremely shorter than the height H and lateral width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. there is

Therefore, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F that occupies the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the total area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 10-2(B), in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, the effect control CPU 120 performs a reserved display operation process (see FIG. 8-13) which will be described later. As a result, each hold display can be rotated around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 10-2(C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop operation process (see FIG. 10-13) described later, so that the game state and the effect being executed are displayed. A message (for example, if a specific ready-to-win effect is in progress, a message corresponding to the state of the effect, such as "In XX mode!") is moved from left to right at a constant speed (e.g., movement speed V3). It is possible to display one

It should be noted that the characters included in the message corresponding to the game state are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time when the display reaches the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and is displayed again from the left to the right. is moved in the direction Therefore, when the message corresponding to the game state is displayed while being moved in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the game state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is easy to recognize the current game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the suspension display in the first storage display area 079SG005D and the second storage storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to rotate and move with

As shown in FIG. 10-2(D), the fourth pattern 079SG005J has an upper pattern 079SG005Ja and a lower pattern 079SG005Jb, and these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb alternately flash at a constant cycle. , to indicate that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are both extinguished (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display when the variable display result is lost, while the variable display result is a big hit or a loss. In this case, both are turned on (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

It should be noted that the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the timing when a new pending memory is generated and the timing when a new variable display is started. is the only display whose number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure reserved memory number and the display of the second special figure reserved memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth pattern 079SG005J, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U , Unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of the variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(A), the image data 1 displays the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa. Data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display the small pattern of the image data 1 decoration pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 10-3(B), the image data 2 is data drawn to display an image of a chance up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 10-3(C), the image data 3 is data drawn to display the variable display of the decoration pattern and the ready-to-win effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(C), the image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. is set. The highest display priority is set for image data 1, and the lowest is set for image data 3 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as an image in a lower layer (bottom layer) than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-3(D), in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 3, and the image based on the image data 1 is displayed. The image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 3 are preferentially displayed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partly invisible or invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is

In this characteristic portion 079SG, although the details will be described later, the images based on the image data 1 and the image data 2 are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images whose progress speed is always constant, while the image data 3 Based on the data stored in the CGROM in advance, the images are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images and still images of a plurality of advancing speeds.

In particular, in this feature part 079SG, although the details will be described later, the display of the animation of the reach effect during the reach effect of the super reach can be executed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It has become. This is because the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V1 and the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect animation to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on the data, part of the effect animation for the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be possible to display

In this way, in the present characteristic section 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the effect moving image changes, to V1, the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player becomes the first speed, and during the non-slow motion period, the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, the slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player is the second slow speed. In other words, the slow-motion moving image, which is the effect moving image whose rendering progress speed is slow in this characteristic portion 079SG, is displayed before the slow-motion moving image, and the image progressing speed is V1 compared to the non-slow-motion moving image. Anything with a slow speed is fine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects is exemplified (see FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as a super reach effect, the contents of the effect animation itself displayed on the image display device 5 are the same as the contents of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. does not change from V1 to V2, that is, by executing a super reach effect that does not become a slow motion period, in the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, the slow motion period may be made easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, in the case of executing the super ready-to-win effect in which the content of the effect moving image is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect moving image is set to the second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention. means that the effect moving image of the same content is displayed at a video progressing speed V2 that is slower than the video progressing speed V1 in the non-slow motion super reach effect, so that the duration is longer than that of the non-slow motion super reach effect. The effect moving image to be displayed corresponds.

In addition, as described above, in this feature part 079SG, by slowing down the image progress speed of the effect moving image, a slow motion effect is configured in which the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect that the player feels is slow, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R , does not change from the playback speed V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. By accelerating the reproduction speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission cycle of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion may be constructed in which the player feels that the progress speed of the ready-to-win performance has slowed down.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG is provided with a plurality of effect output means including display means capable of displaying effect moving images, and among these effect output means, at least one effect output means advances the effect is different between the slow-motion period and the non-slow-motion period so that the player can recognize that the effect being executed is the slow-motion during the slow-motion period.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is always displayed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion The period may change the progress speed of the display of the effect animation of the ready-to-win effect (for example, the progress speed gradually decreases with the passage of time, or the progress speed increases and decreases within a predetermined range).

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characteristic portion 079SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this characteristic portion 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this feature part 079SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 079SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 079SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in this characteristic part 079SG is based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in this feature part 079SG with reference to FIG. ``Probability variable jackpot A'', ``probability variable jackpot B'', and ``probability variable jackpot C'' which are executed and shifted to a high probability high base state, and only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is completed to a low probability high base state. The "non-probable variable jackpot" to be shifted is set.

The big win game state by the "probability variable big win A" is a big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win B" is a big win in which 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. In some cases, the “non-probability variable jackpot” is referred to as a 2-round (2R) non-probability variable jackpot.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in this characteristic portion 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic part 079SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

High-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win A, the variable probability big win B, and the variable probability big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. . Therefore, when the regenerated big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the big hit type as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C" to a big hit state with a small number of rounds. In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic portion 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present characteristic portion 079SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

It should be noted that the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 079SG also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "minor winning".

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 079SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present feature unit 079SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic part 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (super reach β3 big hit variation pattern). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table have different allocation numbers of determination values for PB1-2 to PB1-5. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 500 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. In the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 315 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 515 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. That is, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach β type variation patterns PB1-3 and PB1-4 are at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern determination table, and use the special winning variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern as PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). do.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), PA2-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 loss) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β2) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β3).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 079SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the fact that it is in a time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is performed more frequently due to the shortening fluctuation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α1 (the ready-to-reach effect executed in the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first ready-to-reach effect described later is executed. This is a ready-to-win effect in which the display result is a big hit, and the ready-to-win effect of super reach α2 (ready-to-win effect executed by variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-2) is executed in the first half and the latter half of the first ready-to-win effect described later. This is a ready-to-reach effect in which the variable display result is lost after the change, and the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α3 (ready-to-reach effect executed by variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach to be described later. This is a ready-to-win effect in which a second ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the latter half of the effect are executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a loss.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. In other words, for the variable display of these variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit after being executed up to the second ready-to-win effect is the first ready-to-win effect to be executed. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, the reach effect of super reach β1 (reach effect executed by variable display of fluctuation patterns PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a big hit after the first half of the third reach effect described later is executed. Yes, the reach effect of super reach β2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-4) is changed after the first half and the second half of the third reach effect described later are executed. It is a ready-to-reach production, and the ready-to-reach production of super reach β3 (ready-to-reach production executed with variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) executes the first half and the second half of the third ready-to-reach production described later. After that, a fourth ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed, and the result of the variable display is a big win or a losing effect.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. That is, for the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit after being executed up to the fourth ready-to-win production is the third ready-to-win production. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the second ready-to-win effect is always executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect is always executed after the third ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect may be executed alone.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, each ready-to-win effect can be executed by combining the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect during the variable display, and by combining the third ready-to-reach effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ready-to-reach production is a combination other than these combinations (for example, the first ready-to-reach production and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production and the third You may provide a case where it is executed in a combination of ready-to-win effects, etc.).

In addition, in this feature part 069SG, as shown in FIG. The ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (jackpot expectation) is set higher than the fluctuation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), but the present invention is based on this Not limited, part of the super reach β system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) is super reach α system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may be lower than any of the big hit expectations.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 079SG, there is a game control data holding area 079SG 150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 079SG152. , a game control timer setting unit 079SG153, a game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is a special feature that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 079SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 079SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. Area 079SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 079SG191, a production control timer setting section 079SG192, a production control counter setting section 079SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 079SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 079SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (second 1 pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with these starting entrance winning designation commands and reservation storage number notification commands. , A storage area (entry) for storing separately in the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. Then, when starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , the pending storage number notification command.

The commands stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11(B) are the entries (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start prize determination process of the characterizing portion 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 079SG154, it should be able to specify the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" ( step 079 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 079 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" ( step 079 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the processing of step 079SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079 SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, pending storage for the effect control board 12 Settings for sending the number notification command are made (step 079 SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 079SGS115), the processing of step 079SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 079SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-13 is part of a flow chart showing the effect control process processing in this characterizing part 079SG. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prefetching notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and these first Suspended display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotated display) the suspended displays displayed in the suspended storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation processing (step 079SGS163) and the fourth design display processing (step 079SG164) for executing the variable display of the fourth design 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect control process flag process.

10-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

Also, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off at step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of start winning, 1 buffer number each Shift up (step 079 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decoration design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit B or the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from "334", "778", etc., which are chances. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). executes a chance-up effect determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect in the second half of the first ready-to-win effect or the second half of the third ready-to-win effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-15, when the variable display result is a failure, the chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. decide. Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 80%, and non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable display of the reach of the characteristic portion 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation of big hit is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, in this characteristic portion 079SG, only one production pattern is provided as the production mode of the chance-up production, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as a performance mode of the chance-up performance, and the degree of expectation for big win may differ depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, there is only one chance-up effect start timing. A plurality of performance start timings for performance may be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining execution/non-execution of the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079 SGS279; Y), the notification effect (big hit notification effect or loss Still image display effect for determining the effect pattern of the still image display effect for displaying the still image displayed at the end of the second ready-to-win effect on the image display device 5 during the period until the notification effect is started. A determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-16A, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100% when the variable display result is a failure. If the pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the still image display effect is determined to be the pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-16(B), the pattern SG-1 of the still image display effect is to freeze the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second ready-to-win effect. In the pattern SG-2 of the still image display effect, the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach effect. , is an effect pattern for changing the color of the still image.

In particular, the pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), proceed to step 079SGS283. ), an operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect prompting the player to operate the push button 31B during execution of the fourth ready-to-win effect, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-17(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to the pattern SS at a rate of 80% when the variable display result is a failure. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect at a rate of 20%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(B), the pattern SS-1 of the operation prompting effect is a pattern of displaying the image of the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is a effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size larger than that of the pattern SS-1.

In other words, as the operation promotion effect in the present characteristic portion 079SG, when the image of the push button 31B of a large size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2). ), the ratio is higher than when the image of the normal size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since there is a high probability that the variable display result is a big win (a big win notification performance is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion performance is executed. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

At step 079 SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the obtained image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display effect processing is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. determine whether or not Then, when the process timer after subtraction has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and when the process timer after subtraction has timed out, the process data is processed. As soon as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the production device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

10-18 to 10-35, description will be given of the effects of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in the characteristic portion 079SG.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, the effect animation such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM and effect sounds corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be. Hereinafter, the flashing or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in the characteristic portion 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are all synchronized and flashed or lit. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26(A) to 10-26(C), when the ready-to-win effect develops due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached due to the progress of the battle effect, the display of the moving image of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, when the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after displaying a moving image in which the ally character A succeeds in attacking and the enemy character A falls down, the decorative symbols are stopped in combination with the big win, and the game state is controlled to a big win game state. to be notified. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-26(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the friend character A succeeds is executed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (E)), and then the enemy character is displayed. The display of the moving image of the falling portion is executed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26(F)). Then, the moving image of the part in which it is announced that the decorative symbols are stopped in the combination of the big wins and is controlled to the big win game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Fig. 10-26 (G) applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach α2 or super reach α3 variable display, when the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the second half of the first ready-to-win effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-19 and FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(B), when the transition is made to the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the battle effect between friendly character A and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect, when the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, as shown in FIG. 10-27(B), the chance-up effect may be executed. . The chance-up effect is executed at the progressing speed V1 in the same manner as the effect animation of the battle effect.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-reach effect progresses due to the progress of the battle effect, the display of the moving image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

During the period when friendly character A attacking enemy character A is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α2, when the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Secondly, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the friendly character A's attack fails and is knocked down by the enemy character A, the variable display result is stopped with a combination of the decorative symbols that are lost. is reported.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the part where the friendly character A's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

Further, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-27(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super reach α3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character A succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, it shifts to the execution period of the first half of the second ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28(A) to 10-28(B), when the transition is made to the first half execution period of the second reach effect, the friend character A and the enemy character B The battle production of progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

As the battle effect progresses and the second half of the second ready-to-reach effect first half execution period is approaching, as shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, display of concentration lines is started, and in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character B is started. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the above-described effect rendering is gradually increased.

That is, in the second half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period, the progress speed of the battle production moving image is lowered to V2, and the number of concentration lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes violently. Therefore, the increase in the number of concentration lines and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 can effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result of the battle effect (whether the big win notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed). It is possible.

Then, after the second reach effect latter half execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. The image that was being played (in this characteristic portion 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of the friend character A hits the enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is switched from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the pending display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and the BGM, effect sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is the progress of the animation of the battle production. Return to the period before the speed drops to V2.

Incidentally, when the pattern SG-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the still image display effect, as shown in FIGS. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the end of the still image display effect in which the color is reversed, as a big win notification effect, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B, and after the enemy character B falls down, the game state is controlled to the big win game state. be notified. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-29(F), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

As a jackpot notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. However, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, after the enemy character B falls down, the moving image in which the decoration patterns stop with the combination of the big win is displayed at the advancing speed V1. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not reversed as the still image display effect, and the image shown in FIG. 10-30 (A ) ~ as shown in Figure 10-30 (D), the case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and as shown in Figure 10-30 (F) ~ Figure 10-30 (H), loss notification In some cases, a production is executed.

The jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the big hit notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 10-20. In addition, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is displayed at the advancing speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. After the enemy character B has fallen down, it is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

In addition, as a failure notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the attack of the friendly character A does not hit the enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of the enemy character B hits the friendly character A. After the ally character A hits and falls down, the decorative symbols are stopped by a combination of missing symbols, and it is notified that the big win game state is not controlled.

10-21, as the failure notification effect, a moving image is displayed at the progressing speed V1 until the enemy character B is knocked down by the enemy character B without the attack of the friend character A hitting. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(I), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

10-22, 10-23, and 10-31(A) to 10-31(H), when the variable display is started, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, the effect moving image such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progressing speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM and effect sounds corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31(A) to 10-31(C), when it is time to develop the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the third ready-to-reach effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the third ready-to-win effect progresses as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character B attacks the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is super reach β1 variable display, when the execution period of the first half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 10-22 and FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after a moving image of a successful attack by the ally character B and the enemy character A falling down is displayed, it is reported that the game will be controlled to the big win game state. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character B is successful is performed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30 (E)), and then the enemy character The display of the moving image of the falling part is executed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30(F)). Then, the moving image of the part in which it is announced that the decoration symbols are stopped in the combination of the big wins and is controlled to the big win game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Fig. 10-30 (G) applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach β2 or super reach β3 variable display, when the third reach effect first half execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-31 (D) , the attack of the ally character B is not successful, and the second half of the third ready-to-win effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 and FIGS. 10-32(A) to 10-32(B), when the second half of the third reach effect is executed, the battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect, when the effect moving image of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, as shown in FIG. 10-32(B), the chance-up effect may be executed. . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similarly to the effect animation of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, while the small patterns are displayed with priority over the chance-up production effect animation, the chance-up production production animation is displayed in the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 10-32 (B) It is displayed with priority over "7" displayed on the left and right upper parts of the display device 5). Therefore, in this characteristic part 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the small symbols, and the effect animation of the chance-up effect is displayed. By giving priority to display over the pattern, it is possible to reliably secure an area for displaying the effect moving image of the chang-up effect on the image display device 5. - 特許庁

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the animation of the chance-up production is displayed with priority over the decoration pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration pattern is displayed rather than the production animation of the chance-up production. may also be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which combination of decorative symbols the ready-to-win effect in execution has developed from, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-win effect is approached as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle presentation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is super reach β2 variable display, when the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 10-23 and FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the ally character B's attack fails and is defeated by the enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a miss as a miss notification effect.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the part where the friendly character B's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

In addition, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, a stop display with a combination of the decorative pattern and the small pattern during the design confirmation period, and a non-display of the fourth pattern (both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are extinguished). ) is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super reach β3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character B succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, it shifts to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25 and 10-33(A) to 10-33(B), when the transition is made to the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect, the friend character AB and the enemy character B Battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect first half execution period is approached due to the progress of the battle effect, the image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIGS. Display of a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character B is started in the first display area 079SG005F. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster).

That is, in the second half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect decreases to V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result (whether the big hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed).

Then, when the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect progresses, the operation promoting effect is executed. When pattern SS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 along with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the shape of the push button 31B. display of the meter 079SG005M and the effect image 079SG005E suggesting the operation acceptance period of , and the update display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged update display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 are started. In addition, as described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 10-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B by updating the display of the meter 079SG005M, while enlarging the effect image 079SG005E. Update display progresses. Since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E. The visibility of the battle production is lower than that. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (D) and 10-33 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the button 31B operation reception end timing), the progress does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(A) to 10-34(E), when pattern SS-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the first display of the image display device 5 is displayed. In the center of the region 079SG005F, display of an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger in size than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba as an operation prompting image imitating the shape of the push button 31B and a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B start. and the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. Incidentally, as described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 10-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-34(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation reception period of the push button 31B by updating display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb Most of the images in the battle production are hidden. As described above, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is an image having a size larger than that of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and having a transmittance of 0%. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than in the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the button 31B operation reception end timing), the progress does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is When finished), the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect is executed from the timing when the player operates the push button 31B or the timing when the operation promotion effect ends.

10-24 and FIGS. 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), as the big hit notification effect after the operation promotion effect, there is a moving image in which the attack of the friend character B hits the enemy character B. Although the moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(D), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

10-25 and FIGS. 10-35(E) to 10-35(G). On the other hand, after the attack of the enemy character B hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is informed that the big win game state is not controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed.

10-25, as the failure notification effect, a moving image is displayed at the progressing speed V1 until the combination of the decoration symbols is stopped without the attack of the ally character B being hit. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

Figure 10-26 (H), Figure 10-27 (H), Figure 10-29 (F), Figure 10-30 (E), Figure 10-30 (I), Figure 10-31 (H), Figure 10-32 (H), FIG. 10-35 (D), and FIG. The display of the telop display area 079SG005T including the telop display area 079SG005T including On the other hand, the telop (message) display itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during the slow motion period other than immediately before the notification effect. Also, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a part of the period (non-slow motion period) during which the display of the effect animation of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. During the execution period of the first half part, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1, and the latter half of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect. During the partial execution period, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2. Therefore, while the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progressing speed V2, the degree of emotional empathy of the player for the teammate character displayed during the ready-to-win effect is enhanced, and a big win is announced. Since the sense of anticipation for the execution of the performance can be heightened, the amusement of the game can be improved. On the other hand, during the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, and during the execution period of the latter half of each, the BGM, effect sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R are played. Since the output is unchanged at V4, which is the normal reproduction speed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, since the sound output hand in this characteristic part 079SG includes the voice synthesizing IC 079SG132, the amplifier circuit 079SG134, and the speakers 8L and 8R, reproducibility is ensured during variable display including when the ready-to-win effect is executed and when the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to output high-quality background music (music), effect sounds, and other effects sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, during the execution period of the second reach production second half and during the execution period of the fourth reach production latter half, the game effect Since the lamp 9 blinks at a period shorter than usual, the effect can be improved by blinking the game effect lamp 9 at a short period in the period when the progress speed of the effect moving image is V2.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the form in which the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the ready-to-win effect or during the period of the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the player can recognize from the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification effect will be executed soon, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, an example has been illustrated in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second reach effect latter half part and during the execution period of the fourth reach effect latter half part execution period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing of the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during each execution period of the first ready-to-reach effect, the second ready-to-reach effect, the third ready-to-reach effect, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect, the effect animation of the ready-to-reach effect progresses. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, both the rotation speed of the pending display and the movement speed of the telop are constant at V3, and the reproduction speed of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example is given in which both the rotation speed of the suspension display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement display speed of the telop are set to V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each ready-to-win effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the area of the third display area 079SG005Sb combined. During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-win effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby improving the game interest.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, in the period other than during the reach effect, the rotation display of the suspension display is rotated at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspension memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspension memory display area 079SG005U. In the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is performed at the moving speed V3. It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and at the same time when the display ends, the characters appear in the telop display area 079SG005T. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from left to right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 079SG, the form in which the entire telop is always moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop is moved in the telop display area 079SG005T. A portion of the displayed telop may be invisible to the player at some point.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28, in the second half of the reach effect execution period, the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 and the image By executing the effect presentation of displaying the concentration line on the display device 5, the effect presentation can enhance the presentation effect in the latter half execution period of the second ready-to-win presentation, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. The increase in the number makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second ready-to-win performance ends and the big hit notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example of a form in which the effect production in the present invention is displayed as a concentrated line is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle production progresses, the degree of effect of the effect production is gradually increased (for example, the range of movement of the movable body 32 is widened, the volume of the specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased, the stick Alternatively, the vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, or the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be increased.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), 10-31 (G), and 10-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect When the decorative symbols are stopped by a combination of a big hit, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden to display the first display area 079SG005F. Since the image of the big win notification effect is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the big win notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further enhanced, and the player is made to recognize that it is controlled to the big win game state. It can be done easily.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when executing the big hit notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display area 079SG005Sa In the state where the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the second In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the big hit notification effect may be displayed overlapping the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T.

At this time, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed transparently or reduced, or the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U are displayed. The visibility of the big hit notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the reserved displays displayed in the reserved display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29, in the second reach effect latter half execution period, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while FIGS. As shown in 10-21, during the execution period of the still image display effect, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotating display of the suspended display in the first suspended storage display area 079SG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and the Since the movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that the suspension display is being displayed or the telop movement is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect. can be easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the telop due to the stoppage of the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 and 10-29 (A) to 10-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being executed by reversing the color of the still image.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the still image display effect, the form of reversing the color of the still image is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to this, but the forms of changing the color of the still image include changing the color of the still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of the still image, and adding new colors to the still image. It may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the color of the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the color of the fourth pattern displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can easily see the colors displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the pending display, telop, fourth pattern, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

Also, in each variable display of super reach in this characteristic part 079SG, a pattern of shifting to a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect after execution of a first reach effect and a third reach effect, and a pattern of shifting to a first reach effect and a third reach effect Since there is a pattern in which the variable display is terminated by shifting to the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect after the performance is executed, the display of the ready-to-win effect animation progresses during the first ready-to-reach effect and the third ready-to-win effect. Whether or not to shift to the second ready-to-win effect or the fourth ready-to-win effect after being executed at the speed V2, and display of the effect animation of the ready-to-reach effect during the second ready-to-reach effect or the third ready-to-win effect are executed at the progress speed V2. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not it is reported that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state after the game is played, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the first reach production and the third reach production, the second During the execution period of the second half of the first reach production and the second half of the execution period of the second half of the third reach production, the production in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and the second half execution period of the first reach production or the latter half of the third reach production are carried out at the same time. Since it is executed at the speed V1, the progress speed when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the second half of the first half of the ready-to-win performance or from the first half of the execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. is different from the progress speed of the performance in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance. You can prevent it from getting lost. 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-25 and 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G), 10-29 (C) ~ Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 10-35(C), in the big hit notification effect of this characteristic part 079SG, while the animation when the enemy character falls down due to the attack of the friendly character being hit is displayed at the progress speed V2, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10-30 (H) ), FIGS. 10-32(E) to 10-32(G), and FIGS. 10-35(D) to 10-35(F), in the failure notification effect, a moving image when the ally character falls down is executed at the progress speed V1, when the loss notification performance is executed, the display of the performance moving image of the loss notification performance is not executed at the progress speed V2, so that the player is dissatisfied. can be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the result of the variable display of super reach is executed and the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the super reach variable display, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect may be executed at a progressing speed V2 slower than V1. By doing so, it is possible to produce variations in the production of the failure notification production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the third speed in the present invention is set as the progressing speed V1 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect, and the progress speed V2 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect is set as the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, during the second half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the animation of the ready-to-win effect is being executed at the progress speed V2. Therefore, the effect of the fourth ready-to-win effect can be enhanced by the operation promoting effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, while the operation promoting effect is being executed, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promoting effect, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-win effect may be performed at the progress speed V1. Further, a suggestive performance suggesting that the operation promoting performance is executed can be executed before the operation prompting performance is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestive performance, the display of the performance animation of the fourth ready-to-reach performance is displayed at the progress speed V2. may be executed.

In addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M for notifying the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG. While the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are being displayed, the display of the effect animation of the fourth ready-to-win effect is continuously executed at the progress speed V2, but does not proceed until the notification effect. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B. , the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, since the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the end of the operation accepting period of the push button 31B (until the end of the operation promotion effect), the push button is not operated by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation reception period of the push button 31B.

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the push button 31B is used as the detection means in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means is a stick controller 31A or the like other than the push button 31B. In addition to the operating means, sensors capable of detecting the actions of the player, such as motion sensors and touch sensors, may be used.

10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G), 10-29 (C) to 10-29 (E), Figures 10-30 (B) to Figure 10-30 (D), Figures 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figures 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35C) As shown, in the big hit notification effect in this characteristic portion 079SG, the moving image of the part where the attack of the friend character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progressing speed V1, while the moving image of the part where the enemy character falls down is displayed at the progressing speed of V2. is displayed in 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25 and 10-27 (E) to 10-27 (G), 10-30 (E) to 10- 30 (G), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), as shown in this characteristic portion 079SG deviation notification production A moving image is displayed at the progress speed V1 and is never displayed at the progress speed V2. That is, when the big win notification effect is executed, a part of the effect animation of the big win notification effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby impressing the player that the big win game state is controlled. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a big hit in the present invention, the still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (still image display effect in which colors are inverted). As a still image display effect, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is exemplified as a special effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is , an effect other than the static image display effect of the pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.) may be executed.

In addition, the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG includes a pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating a push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F. It can be executed in any of the pattern SS-2 in which the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The visibility of the battle production of 4 reach production is low. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2 is Since the variable display result is lower than the ratio of the big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to which pattern SS-1 or SS-2 the operation promoting performance is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation prompting effect, the operation prompting image During the display of 079SG005Ba, the display of the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb shows the progress speed V2 (slow motion ) in which the visibility of the fourth ready-to-win effect animation (battle effect) being displayed is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is pattern SS -2, in addition to the display of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the fourth reach effect (battle production) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period in which the effect video (battle effect) of the fourth reach effect is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to pattern SS-2 of the operation promotion effect, the effect video of the fourth reach effect The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this characterizing portion 079SG, as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the second ready-to-win effect can be executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect can be executed after the third ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, the variable display of super reach α1 for announcing a big win after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and the variable display of super reach β1 for notifying a big win after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the first half of the first reach performance execution period after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and notifies of a failure, and second half of the third reach performance after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Variable display of super ready-to-reach β2 for executing partial execution period and informing loss, variable display of super ready-to-win α3 to shift to second ready-to-win performance after first ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period, third ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period After that, it is possible to execute variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the fourth reach production, and as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , When shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period, the performance animation of each ready-to-win performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first ready-to-win performance first half execution period to the first When shifting to the second half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the first half of the second half of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. , BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4 without changing from the other periods when shifting from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the fourth reach performance. Therefore, when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first reach performance to the second half of the execution period of the first ready-reach performance, when shifting from the second half of the execution period of the first reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the second ready-reach performance, the third reach. To give a player a sense of incongruity when shifting from the performance first half execution period to the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period, and when shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period. You can prevent it from slipping. Furthermore, the display of the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the branch of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player can be easily recognized.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach of this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of super reach, three or more A ready-to-win effect may be executable, or only one ready-to-win effect may be executable.

Although the characteristic part 079SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic parts, and even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention, the present invention can be applied. included.

For example, in the characteristic part 079SG, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect are provided as the reach effect of the super reach. Although the display of is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion), the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern ( A pattern in which the effect moving image is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect motion image is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Further, the content of the effect may be different between the ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect moving image is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the ready-to-reach effect in which the effect moving image is not displayed at the progress speed V2. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always played at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether or not the display of the effect moving image is executed at the progress speed V2. Although the form to be output is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, as a modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, the fourth reach In the first half of each ready-to-reach effect second half execution period of the performance, the playback speed is V4 from the speakers 8L and 8R in the same manner as the first-reach effect, second ready-to-reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth ready-to-reach effect first half execution period. While outputting the effect sound at, in the second half (slow motion period) of each reach effect second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect What is V4? The effect sound may be output at a different reproduction speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the reproduction speed V4). In this manner, the performance effect of the performance sound for the ready-to-win performance can be improved by varying the reproduction speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance animation of the ready-to-win performance is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect by displaying an effect image 079SG005E, displaying an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, or the like. While it is possible to reduce the visibility, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, as shown in FIGS. , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-36(A) to 10-36(D), when the second ready-to-win effect is being executed, when the second ready-to-win effect ends along with the still image display effect, A circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as a part of the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. 10-36(E) and 10-36(F) In this way, it is necessary to notify that it is controlled to the big hit game state as the big hit notification effect, or that it is not controlled to the big win game state as the loss notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (A) to 10-37 (D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player pushes When the operation promoting effect is finished without operating the button 31B, as a part of the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed secondly. Enlarged display is performed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. 10-37(E) and 10-37(F) As described above, it is necessary to notify that it is controlled to the big hit game state as the big hit notification effect, or that it is not controlled to the big win game state as the loss notification effect.

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. Thus, it is possible to reduce the visibility of only the first display area 079SG005F and not to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

As described above, in this modification 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the second After the end of the ready-to-win effect or after the end of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, the change in the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect is to be performed, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb increases. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth symbol, and the like.

The effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image drawn as the image of the second image data shown in FIG. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the display area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is not changed, and the first display area 079SG005Sb is displayed. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be appropriately reduced, and the drawing of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be performed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

In addition, in the present modification 079SG-2, the mode of executing the operation promotion effect during the fourth ready-to-win effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is one of the notification effects. Can be run as part.

In addition, when the operation promotion effect is executed as part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in FIG. 10-38(D), an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and a meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation prompting effect. do.

By displaying the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG.

After that, the player operates the push button 31B, or based on the end of the operation promotion performance without the player operating the push button 31B, the game is controlled to the big win game state, or the big win game state. is notified that it is not controlled by

As described above, in the modification 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data are reduced. Since the visibility of is not lowered, the operation promoting effect can be emphasized with respect to the fourth ready-to-win effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to operate the push button 31B.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, when the static image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, the variable display result always becomes a big hit. It is not limited to this, and as a modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always The variable probability big win (furthermore, the variable probability big win A that is most advantageous to the player) may be achieved. Furthermore, as an effect pattern when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, control is performed again to the jackpot game state after the failure notification effect is executed. It may be possible to execute a resurrection effect that notifies of. In addition, in the case where the resurrection effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 in this way, the case where the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot and a non-probability variation jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) A case where it is controlled to the big hit game state and a case where it is controlled to the big hit game state of probability variable big hit) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big win notification performance is executed after the still image display performance is executed in the pattern SS-2, so that the game interest can be improved. .

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, as an example of displaying a message indicating the gaming state as a telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T As the displayed telop, it is possible to display a message suggesting whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to the jackpot game state, the title of the ready-to-win effect being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, the mode in which a telop can be displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T according to the state of the effect being executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T. The telops displayed in , are those that can specify the game state, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit in the variable display during execution (jackpot expectation), the explanation of the production during execution (especially the reach production), the reach production It may be an announcement effect or the like that can be executed from the timing before.

10-33 and 10-34, in the characteristic portion 079SG, during the period in which the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the operation promotion effect (the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion display of the image 079SG005Bb) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

10-33 and 10-34, the characteristic portion 079SG exemplifies a mode of displaying an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb on the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is not limited to simply displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As an effect before displaying, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B are moved toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are overlapped and displayed to form an operation prompting image. An effect in which 079SG005Ba and an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb are displayed may be executed.

In addition, when the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the central portion of the image display device 5 is executed as an indication effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B The movement display speed may decrease as the image approaches the center of the image display device 5 . By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation prompting effect will be executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (light emitting colors) of the game effect lamps 9 differs from that when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. may For example, when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light in a plurality of colors, while the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the moving image display of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the emission color of the game effect lamp 9.例文帳に追加

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the display of the moving image of the ready-to-win effect and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Later, an example is given in which the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination indicating a big win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination indicating a big win. The timing may be during the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that the player can operate. may be applied to By doing so, when the player has set the output of the effect sound that suits his/her preference, the speaker 8L is displayed when the moving image of each reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. , 8R is reproduced at the reproduction speed V4 without change, the effect sound is faster than the reproduction speed V4 even though the player himself/herself selects the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement due to low speed reproduction.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as the end suggestion effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute the effect in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect. is executed, the variable display result is always lost, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second half of the first reach effect execution period and the second half of the third reach effect, After the effect of defeating the ally character by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect, and then the variable display result shows the big win. (For example, a case of executing a resurrection effect) may be provided.

When executing the resurrection effect in this manner, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and blinked prior to the display of the moving image of the resurrection effect on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is given to the player. may be made to recognize that is executed. Furthermore, as the effect mode of the resurrection effect, for example, the effect may be such that the ally character attacks the enemy character again and defeats the enemy character. In particular, when the resurrection effect is executed, a part of the moving image of the resurrection effect (for example, the moving image of the scene in which the enemy character falls down) is displayed at the progress speed V2 so as to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. good too.

In addition, although a plurality of characteristic portions and modifications are disclosed in the present specification, the game machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more characteristic portions and modifications from these plurality of characteristic portions and modifications. You may

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 079SG may be a pachinko game machine that can change the jackpot probability by changing the set values as shown in FIGS. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display results are not displayed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is set to a high setting value (eg, 6) that is advantageous for the player. is set, even if the variable display results of super reach α1 and super reach β1 are out of range at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in the pachinko game machine 1 good. By doing so, it is possible to use the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the variable display result is wrong while suppressing the player's interest in the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1. It becomes possible.

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120) and
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
moreover,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
Continuing the second guide display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is finished;
Game machines are mentioned.
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

In other words, by not changing the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to make the player feel uncomfortable, and after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In a predetermined period of , an instruction to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction is emphasized by the first guide display and the second guide display, and after that, the second guide display is taken over without taking over the first guide display and the game ball is shot in the predetermined direction. By instructing the player to shoot a game ball, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling troublesome by not overemphasizing the instruction, and furthermore, the second guide display is first performed to discreetly shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction from now on. , and after that, recognize the name of the advantageous state, and after recognizing it, the player can firmly instruct to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction by the first guidance display. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to cause a player to feel uncomfortable when installed in a gaming facility, and that gives an easy-to-understand instruction of the direction in which the game ball should be shot in an advantageous state.

Moreover, it is preferable to output not only the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect but also the effect sound corresponding to the guidance display at the same speed. By doing so, appropriate and easy-to-understand information can be given to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Also, the game information may be suggested to the player according to the display period or speed of the name display. For example, if the display period of the name display is long, the probability of winning a big win (retained series) after the end of the big win may be increased. In addition, when the display period of the name display is long, the probability of the variable probability big hit may be increased. By doing so, attention can be drawn to the name display, and interest is improved.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving interest and preferably executing an instruction to prompt a player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction, a display result of a variable display is shown. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the specific display result,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the name display of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
A game machine that continues the second guide display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is finished is exemplified. The form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

<Description on Characteristic Portion 075F>
Next, the game machine according to the characteristic portion 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-60.

[Configuration of pachinko game machine 1 related to characteristic part 075F]
It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characterizing part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 11-4). (usually called a large winning opening) is formed.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is installed in the space between the game board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A large prize winning opening door is provided, and the large winning opening door slides horizontally between the inner side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close the path to the normal large winning opening for the game balls. be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in an off state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game balls enter the normal large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the normal large winning opening. .

A game ball entering the normal big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through a region provided inside the normal big winning hole. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23, the game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. Also, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round ends and the normal big winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V-variable winning ball device 075F007B includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see FIG. 11-4). V big prize opening) is formed.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning entrance door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning entrance door is located between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By horizontally sliding and opening the space between , the path for the game ball to the V big winning opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V large winning opening. .

A game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024 (see FIG. 11-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V prize area) provided inside the V big prize opening. . By detecting the game ball by the V winning switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. In other words, in this embodiment, V winning is generated on the condition that the game ball enters the V big winning opening during the round of the jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. . In addition, the normal big prize mouth and the V big prize mouth are also collectively referred to as the big prize mouth. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

A pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of lamps on a game board 2.例文帳に追加Specifically, in the pachinko game machine 1, in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacker lamp 9c provided in the vicinity of the normal big winning opening and the V big winning opening, an attacker upper lamp 075F009U, a left lower lamp 075F009D provided on the lower left of the game board 2, a board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and A board left lamp 075F009E is provided.

The movable body lamp 9d lights or flashes a lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is in a stopped state or an operating state, so that characters attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example "XXX") is emitted. The attacker lamp 9c emits light in the vicinity of the attacker by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U emits light near the upper part of the attacker by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D emits light near the lower left corner of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a character-like housing, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the character-like housing on the right side of the image display device 5 emits light. . The panel left lamp 075F009E emits light near the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. Note that the board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a character-like housing, like the board right lamp 075F009F. Also, the board right lamp 075F009F and the board left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.) like the movable body lamp 9d.

A pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of lamps in a game machine frame 3. - 特許庁Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a frame lamp made up of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3. Prepare.

Here, FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram showing the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of 11 lamps, 1st to 11th lamps, extending counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3 . The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), thereby causing the vicinity of the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has a group of 11 lamps, 1st to 11th lamps, clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3 . The frame right lamp 075F009R lights or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), thereby causing the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special figure LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the game board 2. - 特許庁The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and shown in FIG. It is a substrate that plays the role of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the variation of the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED.

Here, FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special figure LED board 075F020 and the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 11-3(a), the special figure LED board 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 that indicates the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable that indicates the variable display of the second special figure. Display unit 075F022, special figure 1 storage display unit 075F023 showing the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, special figure 2 memory display part showing the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special figure game 075F024, a normal pattern storage display unit 075F025 showing the number of normal pattern pending storage, a normal pattern display unit 075F026 showing variable display of normal patterns, a right hitting display unit 075F030 prompting the player to hit right, and a variable state , a time saving display portion 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display portion 075F027 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, the result, the current game state, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking by lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 075F020 can urge the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/extinguishment of lighting means such as an LED in the right hitting display section 075F030. In this embodiment, when the player is urged to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F030 lights (lights up), and when the player is not urged to hit to the right, That is, when prompting the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hitting display section 075F030 is extinguished. After the design is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 075F030, and after the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display part 075F030 is extinguished. Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the big win game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may light the right-hand hitting display section 075F030 only during the big win round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 and turns off the right hitting display section 075F030.

Here, hitting to the right means that the game ball is shot toward the second flow path out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. is to operate the hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path passing through the left area of the game area, and ahead of it is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This path does not have the second start winning opening formed in 6B. The second flow path is, for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area, and beyond that is a second start winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V grand prize opening) exist. When the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows through the first flow-down path toward the first start winning opening. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow-down path, the game ball passes through the second flow-down path and enters the second start winning opening or the big winning opening (normal big winning opening, V big winning opening). flow into. In this embodiment, in the jackpot game after the jackpot occurs and the game state after the jackpot game (time saving state and probability variable state), the player hits to the right, so that the game area is provided on the right side The game ball is allowed to enter the second start winning opening and the big winning opening, and during this time, the right-handed display section 075F030 prompts the player to hit right. The player hits to the right while the display urging him to hit to the right is being displayed, causing the game balls to enter the second start winning opening and a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls to be paid out. The right of the second special game can be obtained, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls into the normal big winning opening. Furthermore, as will be described later in detail, the V big winning opening is opened during the round of the probability variable jackpot. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and be controlled to the variable probability state. Therefore, by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is being displayed, the player can benefit overall. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to shoot the game ball toward the first flow-down path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 11-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 corresponds to the special figure 1 memory display unit 075F051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game and the second special figure game. Special figure 2 storage display unit 075F052 showing the second reserved storage number, Special figure 1 variable display part 075F053 indicating the status or display result of the variable display of the first special figure, The situation of the variable display of the second special figure or It has a special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 showing the display result and a right hitting display portion 075F055 prompting the player to hit right. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence/absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of reservations, and the instruction to hit to the right by lighting/flashing/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means. Below, it is also called the variable display of the 1st special design to represent the variation of the stop design of the 1st special design by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display section 075F021. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 is also referred to as the variation display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) to indicate that the player should hit to the right. is not urged to the player, that is, when the player is urged to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 is extinguished. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 120 for effect control lights the right-handed display part 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103 . Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the big win game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may light up the right-hand hitting display section 075F055 only during the big win round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 extinguishes the right-handed display portion 075F055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103 .

FIG. 11-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the right board lamp 075F009F, the left board lamp 075F009E, the right frame lamp 075F009R, and the left frame lamp 075F009L , is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (blinking) under the control of the effect control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. The movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the right board lamp 075F009F, the left board lamp 075F009E, the right frame lamp 075F009R, and the left frame lamp 075F009L, or all of them are played together. Also called effect lamp 9 .

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and is capable of lighting (blinking) each display portion under the control of the control CPU 120. FIG.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display unit can be lit (flashed) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
11-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 displays a first reserved memory display area 075F005D in which the number of reserved memories can be displayed by the number of circular reserved indications, and the number of second reserved memories is displayed by the number of reserved indications of the circle. A second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second reserved storage display area 075F005U.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb including a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first reserved memory number, and a display of the second reserved memory number. is doing.

At the center of the first display area 075F005F, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged, and the variable display of the decorative patterns can be executed. It's becoming Also, a small pattern 075F005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small designs are the decorative designs displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs displayed in the "middle" decorative design display areas 5C, and the "right" decorative design display areas. Designs corresponding to each of the decorative designs displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 075F005M is also a pattern that is always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, the decoration pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is located at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. In the part, it is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 075F005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided in the lower center of the first display area 075F005F.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-6 to 11-8.

(jackpot type)
FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in FIG. 11-6, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the big win, there is a big win probability after the big win game state ends, a base after the big win game state ends, and a fluctuation time after the big win game state ends. , and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot.

Specifically, as types of jackpots, 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot are provided. In addition, below, the mark of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth. In the 5R normal jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes V difficult to win (for example, the time to open the lid that opens and closes the V big winning opening is shorter than a predetermined time, or the lid The game ball is not allowed to enter a specific area by repeating the opening and closing of the box, etc.), and after five rounds of the jackpot game state are completed, the jackpot is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state. In the normal jackpot, either the condition that such a low probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is established. continue until

The 5R probability variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win V ), which is controlled to a high-probability state and a high-base state after five rounds of the jackpot game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpot, either the condition that such a high probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is established. continue until

The 10R probability variable jackpot is a control pattern in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is easy to win V ), which is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after 10 rounds of the jackpot game state is completed. In the probability variable jackpot, either the condition that such a high probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is established. continue until

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot have common decorative symbols that stop when the jackpot occurs. In addition, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable variable jackpot have common fanfare effects (for example, backgrounds, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) that are performed when the jackpot occurs. The performance mode of the round performance (for example, the background, the characters appearing, the sound effect, etc.) is common to each other, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize which of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot has occurred, as far as the stopped decorative symbols, fanfare effects, and round effects are seen. Here, in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (4R in this embodiment). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V big winning hole by striking to the right with the aim of the V big winning hole, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state.

In this way, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable probability jackpot make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the variable probability jackpot has occurred until the middle of the round, so these jackpots are also called chance bonuses.

As for the 10R high probability variable jackpot, the V big winning opening is opened in the predetermined round (the 9th round in this embodiment) as in the 5R high probability variable jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V big winning hole by striking to the right with the aim of the V big winning hole, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. However, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs, the fanfare production mode (for example, the background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) and the round production that is performed during the round of the jackpot game state is different from the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, when the 10R variable probability big win occurs, the player can recognize that the variable probability big win has occurred. Such a 10R probability variable jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in Figure 11-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for judging whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, updated from 0 to the upper limit of 65535, and then updated from 0 again. Random 1 is a random counter (for determining the type of jackpot) that determines the jackpot type to one of the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for variation pattern type determination) that determines the type (type) of the variation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for variation pattern determination) that determines a variation pattern (variation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for normal design hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal design. Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of random 4 (for random 4 initial value determination).

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, which of a plurality of types of jackpots such as a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, and a 10R probability variable jackpot as a jackpot gaming state is selected based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). It is determined. At this time, the jackpot pattern may also be determined based on the random 1 value.

Also, first, the variation pattern type is determined using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 4) is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a big hit, the variation patterns are classified into a normal reach variation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach variation pattern type with super reach. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. Also, if it is a loss, it is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type that does not involve reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

In such a variation pattern type, when the display result is lost, the selection rate of the variation pattern type is different between when it is in the time saving state and when it is not in the time saving state (in the time saving state, compared to when it is not in the time saving state Therefore, the percentage of selecting a variation pattern type with a short variation display time such as the normal variation pattern type is set high). Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed is a predetermined number or more and when it is less than a predetermined number. When the reserved memory number of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, execution of reserved number reduction control for shortening the variable display time compared to when the reserved memory number of each special symbol is less than the predetermined number. You may make it For example, in the hold number reduction control state, compared to when it is not in the hold number reduction control state, it is set so that the rate of selecting a fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time such as a normal fluctuation pattern type is higher , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened compared to when the number of holds reduction control state is not in effect. Further, in the hold number reduction control, even if the same change pattern type is selected, the change display time itself of the change pattern type may be shortened compared to when the hold number reduction control state is not performed.

Also, the variation pattern may be a one-stage determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery instead of the two-stage determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 11-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a big-hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 11-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the RO 101, and is a table in which jackpot determination values to be compared with the random R are set. The big hit determination table includes a normal (non-variable probability) big win determination table used in a normal state (game state not variable probability state, that is, non-variable probability state) and a variable probability big win determination table used in the variable probability state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, each numerical value listed in the left column of FIG. Each numerical value described in the column is set as a jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value set in the probability variable jackpot judgment table is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (called the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). By adding the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number of jackpot determination values (referred to as the probability variable jackpot determination value or the second jackpot determination value) than the probability variable jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined that the game is a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). ), it is decided to make a big hit (a normal big win or a variable probability big win) with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 11-8(A) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

FIGS. 11-8 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table. FIG. 11-8(B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 11-8(C) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11-8 (B), the numerical value to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and , and "10R probability variable jackpot" are set with corresponding jackpot determination values. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11-8(C), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R probability variable jackpot", which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, is set.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a decision value (jackpot pattern determination value) for determining the jackpot pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to the "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "1". The determination value corresponding to the "5R probability variable big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variable big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "7". The special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022 on the special figure LED board 075F020 are such that the lighting means such as LED lights or blinks in a lighting mode corresponding to each big hit pattern, so that the stopped jackpot pattern can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as LED in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. A jackpot pattern can be shown.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot type, and the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, the ratio of selecting "10R probability variable jackpot" is higher than the jackpot types selectable with the first special symbol for the jackpot with the second special symbol, and the player The ratio of selecting the jackpot type that is advantageous for the player is high.

(Production control command)
FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various production control commands to the production control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, the 1st byte indicates MODE (class of command), and the 2nd byte indicates EXT (type of command). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-9 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In the following, "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special figure. When the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H) is received, the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decoration pattern.

The command 81XX(H) is a variation pattern command designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols to be variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbols (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01(H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that it is determined to be a failure. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R normal jackpot is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R probability variable jackpot is determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that the 10R probability variable jackpot is determined. Each of the losing designation command, the 5R normal jackpot designation command, the 5R probability variable jackpot designation command, and the 10R probability variable jackpot designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8C system commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the first special figure. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the second special figure. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates display of the initial screen at power-on) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery specification command that specifies recovery from power failure (specifies display of a power failure recovery screen) that is transmitted when power supply to the game machine is resumed. A command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating a normal state background. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability changing state designation command that designates the background of the probability changing state. Each of the normal state designation command, the time saving state designation command, and the variable probability state designation command, or these are collectively referred to as the 95 series command or the background designation command. A command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of the 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command, and a jackpot start 3 designation command, or these commands are also collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designation command during the opening of the big winning opening is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX(H) is a post-opening designation command for the large winning opening that indicates closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after the opening of the big winning opening is also called an A2 system command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of the 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designation command, the jackpot end 2 designation command, and the jackpot end 3 designation command, or collectively these commands are also called A3 series commands.

Command AD00 (H) is a variable probability determination device passing designation command that designates that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device passage specification command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designating command that designates that the first reserved storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved storage number designation command is also called a C1-type command. The command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that designates that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserve storage number designation command is also called a C2-type command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are the contents of the judgment result at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur and the judgment result of the type of the big win among the results of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results is.

C7XX(H) is a large winning opening designation command indicating passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display extinguishing command indicating extinguishing of the right-handed display. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In this embodiment, especially the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD system command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not there will be a big hit at the time of start-up winning, and determines the range of determination values of the type of the big win and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. Then, a value designating a big hit and a value designating the type of the big win are set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, and control is performed to transmit them to the effect control CPU 120 . In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type to the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can recognize the type of the big win, and can recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F will be described. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 11-10 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 11-10, in the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 can store the first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved storage buffer (second special It is determined whether or not there is reserved storage data in a storage buffer for storing reserved storage information of symbols (step 075FS001). If there is no reserved storage data in either the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (N at step 075FS001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stopped (step 075FS002). When the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal process is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y at step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, after transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt, based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is set, the customer It is controlled so as not to send the wait demo designation command. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is reset when the variable display of the next special symbol is started.

When there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not it is data (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer (the Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for a second special symbol (step 075FS005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006 ).

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special The variable display of the pattern is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

According to the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is displayed in the second 1 It is executed with priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the reserved storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the saving area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the reserve storage buffer of RAM 102 . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in a pending storage buffer in RAM 102 .

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 Store the random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103, based on the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction, performs control to transmit the reserved storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 ( step 075FS009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the reserve storage buffer, and executes a judging module for a big hit (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging a big hit, which is extracted in the starting winning judging process and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and judges the big win. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value (see FIG. 11-8) with a big-hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big-hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit.

In the process of judging a big hit, when the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than when the game state is a non-variable probability state (normal game state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, the probability variable jackpot determination table (table in which the numbers on the right side of FIG. 11-8 (A) are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values There is provided a normal jackpot determination table (a table in which numerical values on the left side of FIG. 11-8(A) are set) which is set smaller than the time jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the variable probability state, and when the gaming state is the variable probability state, performs the processing for judging the big hit using the variable probability big hit determination table, and the game state is normal. When it is in the state or the time-saving state, the judgment of the big hit is processed using the normal big-hit judgment table. That is, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big-hit determination values shown in FIG. 11-8(A). If it is determined to be a big hit (Y at step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. Determining whether or not to make a big win means determining whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but it also means determining whether or not the stop symbols in the special symbols are to be the big winning symbols. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state is performed by whether or not the variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the game state is shifted to the variable probability state, and is reset when ending the variable probability state. Specifically, the probability variable flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the condition that the next big hit is determined. It is reset at the timing of ending the variable display of the special symbols and stop-displaying the stop symbols when the earlier condition is established.

If the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big-hit determination values (N at step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

In step 075FS011, if the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) coincides with any of the big-hit determination values, the CPU 103 sets a big-hit flag indicating a big hit (step 075FS012). It should be noted that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used for determining one of the plurality of types of jackpot types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11-8 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. One of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables is selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 11-8(B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 11-8(C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging the type of jackpot extracted in the starting winning judgment process and pre-stored in the first holding memory buffer or the second holding memory buffer, and uses the jackpot type judgment table selected in step 075FS013 to hold the random number. A jackpot type and a jackpot pattern corresponding to a value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for judging the jackpot type stored in the storage buffer is determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in FIGS. 11-8 (B) and (C), for the first special symbols and the second special symbols, the relationship between the jackpot types and the jackpot patterns is set so that the jackpot patterns are different for each jackpot type. Since the big win type and the big win pattern are determined at the same time, the correspondence relationship between the big win pattern and the game control according to the big win class is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variable jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variable jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol stop symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot pattern determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop pattern of the special patterns according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``3'' is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variable jackpot", "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result specifying command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 11-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 11-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a big hit variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the big hit type, and when the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects a losing variation pattern. Select the type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads random 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) from the first reservation storage buffer or the second reservation storage buffer, and refers to the selected table to select the variation pattern type from among a plurality of types. to decide.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a variable time timer formed in the RAM 102 to a value corresponding to the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol variation processing)
11-12 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 11-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y at step 075FS202), changes the value of the special symbol process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (step 075FS203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N at step 075FS202), the process is terminated.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIGS. 11-13 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to terminate the variable display of the special symbols, and stops at the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 or the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022. Control for deriving and displaying the pattern is performed (step 075FS301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display section 075F022 is terminated. In addition, a pattern confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 . Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). Then, when the jackpot flag is not set (N at step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y at step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the variable probability flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, by referring to the opening pattern data stored in the RO 101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), Data indicating the release mode such as interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning openings in all of the 1st to 5th rounds is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102 . In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加Further, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加Data on the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Also, a value corresponding to the fanfare time, which is the time for displaying the big win (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5), is set in the big winning hole control timer (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the big win opening pre-processing, the big winning hole control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the big winning hole is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the processing is terminated.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set in step 075FS303 (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 075FS309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N at step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving frequency counter indicating the remaining fluctuation frequency of the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time saving frequency counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the losing display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the game state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. At step 075FS311, when the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N at step 075FS311), the process proceeds to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step 075FS313). If the variable probability flag is set (Y at step 075FS313), the variable probability flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS315) in response to the game state shifting from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315), and proceeds to step 075FS316. move on. If the variable probability flag is not set at step 075FS313 (N at step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the processing of step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process is terminated.

(Jackpot opening pretreatment)
FIGS. 11-14 are flowcharts showing an example of the jackpot opening pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 11-14, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS402), the process is terminated.

When the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y at step 075FS402), a special winning hole open designating command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, according to the opening pattern, the solenoid 82 is driven to open the normal big winning opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the normal big winning opening is opened in the first round.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step 075FS306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning hole control timer to the maximum time (large winning hole opening time) during which the big winning hole can be opened. The corresponding big winning opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process is terminated.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIGS. 11-15 are flowcharts showing an example of the process during the opening of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 11-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer has reached 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y at step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS502), it is determined whether or not the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (step 075FS503). Whether or not the normal big winning slot or the V big winning slot is open may be determined by the value of the opening number counter.

If it is determined at step 075FS503 that the normal big winning opening or the V big winning opening is not open (N at step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal big prize slot or the V big prize slot is open (Y at step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N at step 075FS504), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is ON (Y at step 075FS504), the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (updated by addition) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variable probability determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the variable probability state is controlled when the V winning occurs. If the variable probability determination flag is set (Y at step 075FS506), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the variable probability determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N at step 075FS507), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y at step 075FS507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS508), the probability variation determination device passing designation command is transmitted (step 075FS509), and the process of step 075FS510 is shifted to do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach the predetermined number (N at step 075FS510), the process is terminated.

When the value of the winning number counter reaches a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or to drive the solenoid 075F083 to close the V big winning opening. is closed (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 clears (sets to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the processing.

(Jackpot opening post-processing)
FIGS. 11-16 are flow charts showing an example of the process after the opening of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 11-16, in the process after opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening number counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (that the jackpot game has ended) is set to the big win opening control timer. For example, the time to notify in the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process exit.

At step 075FS601, if the value of the counter for the number of openings is not 0 (N at step 075FS601), a designated command after opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the round starts in the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round (also referred to as the V open round) in which the V big winning opening is opened, that is, the next round is the V open round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N at step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 and open the normal big winning opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y at step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 and open the V big winning opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIGS. 11-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the jackpot ending process. As shown in FIG. 11-17, in the jackpot ending process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot winning opening control timer to which the jackpot ending time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process is terminated. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the big hit flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a variable probability determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the variable probability determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. At step 075FS704, if the variable probability determination flag is set (Y at step 075FS704), the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability variation state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the probability variation determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set (step 075FS710), and 150 is set to the time saving frequency counter (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 075FS705), and 100 is set to the time saving number counter (step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether it is in any game state, variable probability, short time, or normal, by a variable probability state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103 .

(Production processing during jackpot)
Next, processing by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 will be described. FIGS. 11-18 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect processing during the big hit. As shown in FIG. 11-18, during the big hit effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the big hit end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, a flag such as a jackpot end designation command reception flag is set by the effect control CPU 120 when data indicating that the jackpot end designation command is received is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and the jackpot is won. It is erased at a predetermined timing such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N at step 075FS651), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y at step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 075FS656). In addition, according to the content of the process data set next, the control of the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed (step 075FS657). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads image data from the ROM 121 according to the content of the process data and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display an image corresponding to the effect during the round on the image display device 5 . . In addition, it outputs a control signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/blinking/extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 . Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the production device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is continued according to the contents of the set process data. (step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the process data described above based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 . For example, when the production control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big win, the production control CPU 120 executes a fanfare production by controlling the production device. Set data. Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big hit, the right-handed display part 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 is displayed to prompt the player to hit to the right. A lighting means such as an LED is turned on.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A1 system command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of the big win, the effect during the round is executed by controlling the effect device as follows. To do so, set the process data corresponding to the production during the round.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a special winning opening open specifying command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 2R of the 5R normal jackpot, it executes the V probability variable suggesting effect suggesting whether or not the probability variable jackpot. set the process data of At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A102 (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V probability variation suggesting performance) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a command (A102 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 2R of the 5R variable probability jackpot, process data for executing the V variable probability suggestive effect (see FIG. 11-41). set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot open designation command (A102 (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V probability variation suggesting performance) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designation command (A103 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 3R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the V notice for notifying that the next 4R is the V open round. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIG. 11-42). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A103 A big win round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V notice performance) corresponding to the specified big win round is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the game ball enters the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIG. 11-43) to aim at the V that makes you aim. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot after opening the jackpot (A203 A command) is used to specify the finished big win round (in this case, 3R), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the end of the specified big win round is set. Aim for the V effect is a guidance display using an image display regarding the V big prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the "Aim for V" effect, an image is displayed to urge the player to hit to the right so as to shoot the game ball aiming at the V big winning opening, which is a specific area. In the "Aim for V" effect, an image pointing to the specific area of the V big prize opening itself may be displayed, or an image pointing to the vicinity of the V big prize opening of the specific area may be displayed. , an image may be displayed that indicates the route to the V grand prize opening, which is the specific area.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when receiving a special winning opening open specifying command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, continues to aim at V and executes the effect (see FIG. 11-44). Set the process data for At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A104 command) to specify a big win round (in this case, 4R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the specified big win round.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a special winning mouth open designation command (A108 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8R of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the V notice effect for notifying that the next 9R is the V opening round is performed. Set process data for execution. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A108 (8R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (V notice performance in this case) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designated command (A208 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the game ball enters the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect to aim at the V that makes you aim. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the designation command after opening the jackpot (A208 A command) is used to specify the finished big win round (in this case, 8R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the end of the specified big win round.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance aiming at the V continuously when receiving a special winning opening open designation command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 9R of the 10R probability variable jackpot. . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and specifies the jackpot open designation command (A109 command) to specify a big win round (in this case, 9R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the specified big win round.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the big hit round, the V winning effect is executed by the control of the effect device as follows. Set the process data corresponding to the production.

Effect control CPU 120, when receiving a probability variable determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from CPU 103 during 4R of 5R probability variable jackpot, sets process data for executing V winning effect (see FIG. 11-44) .

The production control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning production when receiving the variable probability determination device passing designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during the 9R of the 10R variable probability big hit.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the ending effect (FIGS. 11-46, 11) indicating the end of the jackpot game state -47)) to set the process data.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103, thereby controlling the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, thereby performing various effects. perform the production of

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 075F configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 075F has the content of the game performed in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 that has already been explained, the following description will be given in particular to the portion of the game related to the characteristic portion 075F. do.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first shoots a game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left side area of the game area by hitting to the left. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special game include the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed to urge the player to hit right. As a right-handed promotion effect, a character (for example, "Right-handed") and a figure (for example, an arrow pointing rightward, which is the direction of the second flow path) are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage right-handed hitting. In addition to displaying the image, in the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050, lighting means such as LEDs are lit to prompt right hitting. As a result, the player will hit to the right from then on.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable variable jackpot, and 10 times in the case of the 10R variable jackpot). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

In the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win V, there is no possibility of winning V. Also, since V is not won, the effect of aiming for V is not executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round is displayed. Specifically, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpots are opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V probability variation suggesting performance is executed to suggest whether or not the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting effect, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is not the normal big hit. After that, the V big prize opening is opened in the 4th round, but no V prize is generated, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 5th round after that, and the ending performance is executed when the 5th round is finished.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of the 5R variable probability jackpot, as in the 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening is opened in the 1R and 2R, and in the 2R, the V probability variable that suggests whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot. Suggestion production is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting performance, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is achieved. Then, in the 3rd round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 4th round is the V release round is executed. In the 4th R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 5th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 8th R and the 10th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th R. Specifically, in the case of the 10R variable probability big hit, the normal big prize winning opening is opened in the 1st to 7th R, and the V probability variable suggesting effect is executed to suggest whether or not the probability variable big hit is in the 7th R. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting performance, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is achieved. Then, in the 8th round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is the V open round is executed. In the ninth R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, 150 times in the case of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 10R probability variable jackpot). be done. Furthermore, in the case of the 5R variable probability jackpot and the 10R probability variable jackpot, and when a V prize occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is changed to the variable probability state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) controlled in the time-saving state. controlled by That is, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round is the low-probability-high base state, and in the case of the 5R-probability-variable big win or the 10R-probability-variable big win, the game state after the big win round is the high-probability-high base state.

Even in the variable probability state and the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055. Therefore, after the first big win (also called first win) occurs, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion performance even in the time saving state after the big win round is finished.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the special figure) than the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the general figure) is executed to shorten the normal state, and furthermore, control is executed to improve the probability of becoming a "normal game hit" in the normal state than in the normal state. In addition, in the time-saving state, by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electronic chew support control may be performed to facilitate entry into the winning slot (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after the big hit round, the second special game is started by entering the launched game ball into the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win (also called consecutive chance win) occurs.

As described above, there is a 10R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot in the second special game. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. It should be noted that the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During the round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

Since it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th round. Concretely, as in the case of the first hit, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the 8th round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is the V open round is executed. In the ninth R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state and a probability variable state (high probability and high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) as in the case of the first hit. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot rounds in consecutive wins, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player can hit the consecutive chances in the variable probability state or the short time state after the end of the big hit round, Even in the state, it is always urged to hit to the right by the right hitting promotion effect.

After the first big hit round ends, the probability variable state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring Then, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low-probability-low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055 also ends. As a result, the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting left again.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
11-19 to 11-21, the timing of main processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F will be described. FIGS. 11-19 are timing charts showing an example of the process during the winning variation. FIGS. 11-20 are timing charts showing an example of processing during a big win. FIG. 11-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. 11-19 to 11-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-19, at t1, when the first special game is started by the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 sends the effect control CPU 120 a reserved storage number designation command (C1 system command), background designation command (95 system command), pattern variation designation command (8D system command), display result designation command (8C system command), and variation pattern designation command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the first special symbol (for example, ready-to-win effect, notice effect, etc.) ), and set the process data for executing

For example, the effect control CPU120, by specifying the first reserved memory number based on the reserved memory number designation command, or to update the display of the first reserved memory display area 075F005D, the lighting mode of the special figure 1 memory display unit 075F051 to update. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the game state under control based on the background designation command, and controls the image display device 5 so as to display a background image or the like corresponding to the game state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the start of the variation of the special symbol based on the symbol variation specifying command, and sets the start timing of the effect. Also, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the presence or absence of the big win and the type of the big win based on the display result designation command, and determines the decoration pattern accordingly. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern designation command, the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern (such as presence or absence of reach), and the content of the effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach type of production, etc.).

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, when a big hit occurs, at t3 after that, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right hand display lighting command (FD system command) to the effect control CPU 120. Send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare effect, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image congratulating a big win as fanfare effects, or outputs a sound congratulating a big win from the speakers 8L and 8R. Set the process data for In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image prompting right hitting, or outputs a sound prompting right hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R as a right hitting promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, after that, when the big winning round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning opening and also sends a special winning opening open specification command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the production during the round in the 1Rth round.

After that, when the 1R-th game ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A201 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 2R-th game starts at t6, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A102 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 2Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V probability variation suggestive effect (see FIG. 11-41) based on the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening (A102 command).

After that, when the 2R-th game ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A202 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 3rd round starts at t8, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 3Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V advance notice effect (see FIG. 11-42) based on the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A103 command).

After that, when the 3R-th game ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing inter-round effects between rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the Aim for V effect (see FIG. 11-43) based on the designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and also sends a special winning opening open specification command (A104 command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 4Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V advance notice effect (see FIG. 11-42) based on the special prize opening open designation command (A104 command), and then executes the aim for V effect (see FIG. 11-43). Set process data for execution.

After that, when the V winning occurs at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability variation determining device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V winning effect (see FIG. 11-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A204 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 5Rth game starts at t13, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A105 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 5Rth round.

After that, when the 5R-th game ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A205 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a variable probability state and a short working time state (high probability high base state), but in this state, the CPU 103 changes the effect control command depending on whether the number of pending memories exceeds 0 or not.

For example, at t16, when the number of reserved memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol variation designation to the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the second special symbol (for example, ready-to-win effect, notice effect, etc.) ), and set the process data for executing

On the other hand, when the reserved storage number does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 11-60) that can specify that no game is being played. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image of an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern, or stops outputting sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 11-60. Any production may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
11-22 are explanatory diagrams showing the lighting modes of the lamps. In this embodiment, game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L) , The right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are turned off. Represented by

In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are each lit up, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (B). represented in the form of

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are lit/blinking/lit in a manner corresponding to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 11-22(C).

[Production Mode of Pachinko Machine 1]
Next, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. Figures 11-23 to 11-33 and Figures 11-38 to 11-50 are explanatory diagrams showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 11-23(a), when the losing symbols stop due to the variation of the special symbols in the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. After that, if there is a first reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 system command), background designation command (95 system command), pattern variation designation command (8D system command) to the effect control CPU 120 ), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the first special symbol (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 11-23(b1) to 11-24(b3), the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect in FIG. 11-23(b1) to FIG. It is set based on the pattern variation designation command (8D system command), the display result designation command (8C system command), and the variation pattern designation command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-23(b1) to 11-24(b3) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 11-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (b2), in the case of a big hit variation, an image corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (b3), when a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 and turns on the right hand display. Send a command (FD system command). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. 11-24 (c1) to FIG. 11-38 (d2), the effect control CPU 120 uses a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command). Set based on In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-24(c1) to 11-38(d2) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

Here, the fanfare effect will be described in detail. The fanfare production is divided into a plurality of production parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare effect includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed promotion part. The congratulatory part is a performance part in which a performance for congratulating the winning of a big win is executed. As will be described later with reference to FIG. It is displayed, a sound congratulating the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to congratulate the big win. The name display part is an effect part for notifying the player of the start of the big win round by announcing the name of the big win game state that has occurred, as well as informing the player of the type of the big win game state that has occurred. -24 (c2), (c3), as will be described later, a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5, or a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R , the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to correspond to the start of the big win. The right-handed promotion part is a performance part that encourages the player to hit right-handedly, and uses image display of characters and graphics as described later in FIGS. A large right-handed promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit right. The effect control CPU 120 receives a symbol determination designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the big hit symbols are stopped and the symbols are determined, and then receives a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , the fanfare performance is started, and the fanfare is performed until the normal big winning opening is opened and the big winning round is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-24(c1), an image (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!") is displayed as a congratulatory part in the fanfare production to congratulate the jackpot. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so that it is displayed on the device 5, the sound congratulating the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode congratulates the big win. or In addition, as a right-handed promotion effect, an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and characters (in this example, the characters "right-handed") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5 to promote small right-handed hitting. A performance is performed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers and can display a predetermined image on each layer. As shown in FIG. 11-24(c1), the image made up of graphics and characters in the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is an image congratulating a big hit (in this example, a character image and "Congratulations!"). is displayed on the layer on the front side (in the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 side) than the character image of . In addition, in the fanfare effect, a sound that encourages right-handed hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-handed promotional effect, the right-handed display portion 075F030 and right-handed display portion 075F055 are lit in a manner that encourages right-handed hitting. (Lighting in this example). Note that the order of starting the above-described image display, lighting, etc. is as follows. First, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0-system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD-system command) after design determination, and lights up the right-handed display portion 075F030. The production control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), while the received big hit start designation command (A0-series command), small right handed promotion performance The image display device 5 is caused to display an image consisting of graphics and characters in , and an image congratulating the winning of the jackpot. At this time, the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right hitting promotion performance located further to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the big win. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right-handed display portion 075F030 and the right-handed display portion 075F055, and then the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the image congratulating the big hit are displayed in this order. An image is displayed. In addition, the display of images consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 are determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. is done until At that time, first, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display extinguishing designation command together with a background designating command after design determination, and turns off the right-handed display portion 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display extinguishing designation command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion performance based on the received background designation command. When the process ends, the background image in the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5 . It should be noted that the image consisting of graphics and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting by the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 may start and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of graphics and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect coincides with the lighting period of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055. becomes easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare effect, a part of the name image indicating the name of the generated jackpot game state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS !!" "CHANCE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, sounds corresponding to the start of the big win are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamps 9 are lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big win. The lighting mode changes.

As shown in FIG. 11-25 (c3), as a name display part in the fanfare effect, following FIG. “BONUS!!” in the character image of “CHANCE BONUS!!” is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5 . As a result, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off once before the large right-handed promotion performance to be executed in the right-handed promotion part of the fanfare performance starting from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 11-24 (c4) to FIG. 11-33 (c29), as a right-handed promotion effect, a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and a character (in this example, the character “right-handed”) ) in the center of the image display device 5 in a large size.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare effect and the big right hitting promotion effect based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIGS. 11-34 to 11-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121 . For example, based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table, the effect control CPU 120 emits guidance light to urge the player to hit to the right by moving the light emitting position of the frame lamp. In this embodiment, the light-emitting location literally means a location that emits light. A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is extinguished) is not called a light-emitting location. In another example, the light-emitting location refers to a location that emits light with high brightness. A location may be called a location, but a location where a lamp that is lit with a luminance lower than that of a lamp positioned at the light emission location is not referred to as a light emission location. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the effect control CPU 120 will be specifically described.

FIG. 11-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 11-34, the parent table in the lighting data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable body lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, left board lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the fanfare effect and the hard right hitting promotion effect are defined respectively. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then a hard right hitting promotion effect for 2000 msec. Since the large right hitting promotion effect is configured to be repeated a plurality of times (twice in this embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 repeats the 2000 msec long right hitting promotion effect twice. Become.

FIG. 11-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 11-35, in the child table of the lighting data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is subdivided into the fanfare effect and the right-handed promotion effect, and is referenced in each time period. grandchild table is specified.

Here, regarding the big right hitting promotion effect, the grandchild table W11 common to both the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L is designated. In addition, since the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are turned off without being used in the big right hitting promotion effect, a grandchild table is not provided. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. As for the attacker lamp 9c, the 2000 msec, which is the execution time for the promotion effect of hitting to the right, is subdivided into a plurality of periods, and a plurality of grandchild tables are specified. For example, grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

11-36 and 11-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of grandchild tables in the lighting data table. FIG. 11-36 shows the data in grandchild table W11 for Frame Right Lamp 075F009R and Frame Left Lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 11-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data are defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec. , data for turning off (0x000000) is defined. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 11B are defined for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. In FIG. 11-36, for each lamp included in the frame lamp, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are shown in order to clearly show the lighting period. A dashed circle mark is attached to it.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table W11, first at T1, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, then at T2 the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, and then at T3 the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit. The second lamp lights up, then at T4 the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T5 the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T6 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. The lamp lights up, then at T7 the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. Then, at T10, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting to light, each lamp continues to light while changing its color to seven colors. After that, first at T46, the fourth lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T47 the third lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T48 the second lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then At T52, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T53, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, at T54, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T55. The seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T56, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. After that, each lamp is extinguished until 2000 msec in the one-time large right-handed promotion effect elapses. After all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, the remaining time is only about 320 msec. T57). The first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the frame right lamp 075F009R are extinguished at all times.

Using the grandchild table W11 storing the data as described above, as shown in FIGS. , frame right lamp 075F009R up to the eighth lamp, the frame lamp lights up in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 11-37 shows the data in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d and the grandchild table A11a-A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 11-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data are defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec. Data indicating that the lamp is turned off (0x000000) is defined. In the grandchild table K11, for the movable body lamp 9d, of the characters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, left X (left X), middle X (middle X), right X (right X) Data are provided for each of the In FIG. 11-37, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000 ) are marked with dashed circles.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first, at T3, the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on, then at T4, the X lamp in the movable body lamp 9d is turned on, and then at T5, the movable body lamp is turned on. The right X lamp of 9d lights up. After starting to light, each lamp continues to light while changing its color to seven colors. After that, first, at T48, the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, then at T49, the X lamp in the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, and then at T50, the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off. lights out. After that, each lamp is extinguished until 2000 msec in the one-time large right-handed promotion effect elapses. In addition, after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, the remaining time is only about 320 msec. (T57). Further, when compared with the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain turned off) and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

Using the grandchild table K11 storing the above data, as shown in FIGS. While the movable body lamp 9d is lit, the movable body lamp 9d is turned off. After that, at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned on, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on, and then the middle X and right X lamps are turned on. lights up, each lamp continues to light in seven colors thereafter, and at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out. lights out. As a result, the movable lamp 9d is illuminated in seven colors, starting from the left X lighting, then the middle X lamp, and the right X lamp, so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the movable body lamp 9d is performed twice.

FIG. 11-37 also shows the data in the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 11-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined over a very long time of 600000 msec with respect to 330 msec to be turned on. Data of (0x000000) is defined.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data are defined at intervals of 20 msec for 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats the color change of a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b defines only one pattern color change for 280 nsec. ing. That is, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the attacker lamp 9c over 280 nsec each time the grandchild table A11b is referred to once in 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until 1350 msec is completed, and performs a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of repeating color changes.

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data are defined over a very long time of 600000 msec for the lighting target of 320 msec. there is

When the large right-hand hitting promotion effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then controls the grandchild table A11b at intervals of 280 nsec for 1350 msec. is referenced multiple times to cause the attacker lamp 9c to repeat a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change, and then the grandchild table A11c is referenced over the last 320 msec to turn off the attacker lamp 9c. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24), the frame lamps are illuminated in an arch from left to right, and soon the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned on. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c lights up, then the frame lamps go out in an arch from the left to the right. becomes extinguished. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

Also, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, where the light is turned off at the beginning, the color of the predetermined pattern is repeated in the middle, and the light is turned off after that, the lighting of the attacker lamp 9c is turned on three times. Scenarios are divided into stages, and the same grandchild table A11b is repeatedly referred to for the repetition of the predetermined pattern color in the middle, so that there is no need to prepare data for the entire time from the beginning to the end of lighting for 2000 msec. , it is sufficient to prepare data only for the repeated part. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 11-25(c4), description will be given of the presentation mode in the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part of the fanfare presentation. As shown in FIG. 11-25(c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-25(c5), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-26(c6), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-26(c7), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, X in the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-26(c8), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-27(c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-28(c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-29(c15), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "RIGHT" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. After that, the attacker lamp 9c repeatedly turns on and off (that is, blinks). Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-29 (c16), the image display device 5 continues to display the character image "RIGHT" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-29 (c17), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (c18), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, X in the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (c19), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (c20), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the board right lamp 075F009F is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the flashing attacker lamp 9c is also extinguished. Sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R also stops. As a result, the first series of large right-handed promotion performances is completed.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (c26), the second big right-handed promotion effect is started. At this time, as for the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. It should be noted that, in the second hard hitting to the right promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the right hitting promotion effect. Thereby, when the transition to the jackpot round is started after the big right-hand hitting promotion effect ends, the BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) during the big win round and the sound in the big right-hand hitting promotion effect do not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 11-33 (c27) to (c29), the game effect lamp 9 lights/flashes/extinguishes in the same manner as in the first big right hitting promotion effect in the second big right hitting promotion effect. During this time, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and graphics than the small right-handed promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to hit right in a more emphatic manner than the small right-handed promotion effect. be. Therefore, the player can be urged to hit the right hand in an easy-to-understand manner by executing the large right-hand hitting promotion effect during the fanfare effect.

In addition, in the first big right-handed promotion performance, a sound (for example, queuing sound effect) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance, thereby effectively affecting the player. While it is possible to encourage hitting to the right, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-hand hitting promoting effect in the second big hitting to the right promotion effect, so that the BGM during the subsequent big win round. can be prevented from interfering with

In addition, in the large right-handed promotion performance, the arrow image and the character image are displayed so as to gradually appear in stages, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks to effectively encourage right-handed hitting. The effect is more flashy than the effect of displaying the name image of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 11-24 (c2). For example, the character images appear one by one in the big right hitting promotion effect, but all the character images appear at once in the name image of the big win game state. In addition, as for the size of the character image in the big right hitting promotion effect, the character image in the name image in the big win game state is larger than all the character images. Furthermore, the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect of displaying the name image. Thus, after the name image of the big winning game state is displayed to inform the player of the big winning, the player can be informed of the right hitting by the big right hitting promoting performance with emphasis.

The attacker lamp 9c is a place where the player actually carries the game ball and is aimed at when the game ball is shot. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the place to aim. The attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color such as seven colors without flashing.

In the following example, an effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs will be described. The number of rounds is different for the 10R variable probability jackpot, but the other effects are the same as the 5R variable probability jackpot. In addition, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V notice effect and the V winning prize effect are not executed, but the other effects are the same as the 5R probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished and the second round of the big right-handed promotion effect ends, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (c27), switching to the big hit round is performed. Start. Specifically, the visibility is gradually lowered by fading out the arrow image and the character image of "Right shot!". The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. In addition, the display of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-out. Incidentally, as described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command), a series of performance data up to the stage of FIG. 11-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect in the 1Rth. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-39(d3) to 11-40(e4) on the basis of the special prize opening open specification command (A101 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-39 (d3) to 11-40 (e4) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d3), the background image during the big win round appears by fading in from the state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 is completely white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. In addition, the display of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade-in" and "fade-out" will be specifically described. Fade-in and fade-out are a kind of effect in image display called "transition". A "transition" is a transition inserted between the first cut (image) and the second cut (image) when the scene of the video changes from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It's about the effect. In addition to fade-in and fade-out, transitions include various methods in video editing such as wipe and overlap.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, in fade-in, the transparency (also referred to as transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from a first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to a second degree (for example, 0%) that is lower than the first degree. % or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, use 1 second between 0 and 1 second to gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 50%, The next 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds is used to gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) from 50% to 0% (second degree). On the other hand, as in the method of changing the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) to opaque, it takes a predetermined time to change the transparency (transparency). rate) is not fade-in. Note that when changing the opacity (also referred to as opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), the above % values are reversed. That is, in fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the second degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) over a predetermined period of time.

“Fade-out” is an effect in which an image representing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, in fade-out, the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). %) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second, The transparency (transmittance) is then gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, as in the method of changing the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) to transparent, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. rate) is not faded out. In addition, when changing the opacity (opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), fade-out changes the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0% or 1%) over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparency When the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 0%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually increased to 100%. The image is made transparent in stages to make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-38(d2), the player sees only the white image in the second layer of the screen, which is positioned deeper than the first layer of the screen. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is set to 0%. By gradually lowering to , the background image during the big win round is gradually made opaque to make it easy to see (fade-in). As a result, the player is shown the background image during the big win round on the first layer located in front of the second layer on the screen.

There is also a technique called "crossfade" as a transition. Cross-fading is, for example, fading out the first layer of the screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located behind the first layer. In terms of appearance, it is a method of showing the second layer of the screen after showing the first layer of the screen. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, the first layer of the screen is faded out and then faded in, so that the white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located on the back side is displayed. is displayed once in the middle of switching from the image in the first period of the ED to the image in the second period of the ED.

In this embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the transition as described above is executed, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed in the upper right of the screen is not affected by the switching display of the background image. Display is maintained without being affected. Here, "affected by the background image switching display" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, or the player cannot see the image. The player's visibility of the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the player can see the image of the small right-handed promotion effect a little but cannot understand the meaning (promotion of right-handed hitting) indicated by the image. It means that the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-described phenomenon does not occur and the visibility of the player's visibility of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect is not the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), after the background image during the big win round appears by fading in, as shown in FIG. , a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . At the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big winning round is displayed. Furthermore, an image (an arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. In addition, BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the big win round) starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. It should be noted that, as described above, at the time when this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right-hand hitting promotion effect has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 11-40 (e2), during 1R, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the image of the effect promoting small right hitting is displayed in the upper right ( arrows and letters) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-40 (e3), when the 1Rth is completed, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A201 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-40 (e4), between the rounds, the big prize opening is usually kept closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An image (an arrow and a character) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A102 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 2Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-41(e5) to 11-42(e8) on the basis of the special winning opening open specification command (A102 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-41 (e5) to 11-42 (e8) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the upper right continues. , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 11-41 (e6), during 2R, the V probability variation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, an image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and a text image of "PUSH!!" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to be superimposed on the background image corresponding to the during-round effect. In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode according to the production during the round (such as a V probability variation suggestive production). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the production during the round (such as the V probability variation suggestive production).

As shown in FIG. 11-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability variation suggestive effect, the V A character image of "Success!" In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode according to the production during the round (such as a V probability variation suggestive production). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the production during the round (such as the V probability variation suggestive production).

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (e8), when the 2nd round is completed, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A202 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (e9), between the rounds, the big prize opening is normally kept closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Succeeded!!” is displayed, and further, an image (arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 3Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . 11-42 (e10) to FIG. 11-43 (e12), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10) to FIG. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-42 (e10) to 11-43 (e12) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal big winning opening is opened and the V announcement effect is executed. Specifically, a character image and a character image of "Grab the V in the next round!" In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as V notice performance).

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e11), during the 3R, the V notice effect is continuously executed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5, together with the character image. A character image of "Catch the V in the next round!" is displayed, and further, an image (arrow and characters) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as V notice performance).

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e12), when the 3rd round ends, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. On the other hand, based on the command from CPU103, the production control CPU 120 executes the production aiming at V between the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round.

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13), between rounds, the effect of aiming for V is executed while the big winning hole is closed, that is, the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole. Specifically, the V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large), which is the target (place) to be aimed by the player by hitting to the right, is superimposed on the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An arrow image pointing to the winning slot) and a character image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the "Aim for V" effect, it is possible to prompt the player to hit rightward so as to enter the game ball into the V big winning hole by using the image display related to the V big winning hole. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A104 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4Rth based on the command from the CPU 104 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A104 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-44 (e14) to 11-44 (e15) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V big prize opening is opened, and the "Aim for V" effect is executed. As a result, the player can aim at the V big winning hole by hitting right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

As shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15), during the 4R, the "Aim for V" effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

When a game ball enters the V big winning opening and a V winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits a probability variation determining device passing designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect. It should be noted that the effect control CPU120, the data of each effect of Figure 11-44 (e16) ~ Figure 11-45 (e18), set based on the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-44 (e16) to 11-45 (e18) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-44 (e16), when the V winning effect is executed, the background image corresponding to the mid-round effect is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to indicate that the V winning has occurred. V" image is displayed, and an image (an arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is subsequently displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V winning performance). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (such as the V winning effect).

As shown in FIG. 11-45 (e17), when the 4th round is finished, the V big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A204 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-45 (e18), between rounds, the V big prize gate and the normal big prize gate remain closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and furthermore, the image (arrow and character) of the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A105 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 5Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . 11-45 (e19) to FIG. 11-46 (e21), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect in accordance with the special winning opening open designating command (A105 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-45 (e19) to 11-46 (e21) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 11-46 (e20), during the 5R, the round middle effect is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect continues to the upper right. (arrow and letter) is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 11-46 (e21), when the 5th round is finished, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command after opening the big winning opening (A205 command) to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing after that, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-46 (f1) to 11-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-46 (f1) to 11-47 (f4) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 11-46 (f1), when the ending effect starts, an image is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 for selecting the stage in the variable probability state after the big win game state. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-47 (f2), during the ending production, a name image indicating the name of the probability changing state along with the character image (in this example, the character image of “Yume Yume RUSH!!”) is displayed on the image display device 5. displayed in the center. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-47 (f3), during the ending effect, the addiction suppression notification effect is executed. Specifically, an image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Beware of getting addicted. Pachinko is a game to be enjoyed moderately." Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. It should be noted that, during the winning streak, a game result image showing the game result (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) in the jackpot game state is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending effect, but at the time of the first win. Also in , such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-47 (f4), a forget-to-take prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from forgetting to take a card such as a prepaid card or membership card related to the game. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the end of the ending effect, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), and a symbol variation designation to the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative design in response to the variation in the second special design, or effects during variation in accordance with the variation in the second special design (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 11-48 (g1) and (g2), the performance control CPU 120 stores the data of each performance in FIGS. (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-48 (g1) and (g2) progresses with the passage of time rather than being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-48 (g1), even during the variation of the second special symbol, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 11-48 (g2), the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lost symbol is displayed. Also at this time, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols.

After the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. , a symbol variation designation command (8D system command), a display result designation command (8C system command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative design in response to the variation in the second special design, or effects during variation in accordance with the variation in the second special design (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 11-48 (g3) to FIG. 11-49 (g5), the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect in FIG. 11-48 (g3) to FIG. It is set based on the pattern variation designation command (8D system command), the display result designation command (8C system command), and the variation pattern designation command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-48 (g3) to 11-49 (g5) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 11-48 (g3), even during the variation of the second special symbol, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 11-49 (g4), in the case of a big hit variation, an image corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, A game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win performance. On the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5), the group announcement effect is executed as the announcement effect during the big hit variation. The group notice effect is that objects such as characters appear on the screen of the image display device 5 step by step or all at once to make the visibility of the ready-to-win pattern difficult, and then the object disappears to show the specific pattern. It is a production that makes matching (for example, 777 etc.) appear. Even if a notice effect that makes the visibility of the pattern difficult is executed in such a reach mode, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect ( arrows and letters) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of the effect image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the effect to promote the small right shot or the player cannot see the image of the effect to promote the small right shot due to the display of the effect image such as the group notice. The player's visibility of the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the player's ability to see the image of the production, but the player cannot understand the meaning of the image (promotion of right-handed play). It means that the player's visibility is given some influence. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-described phenomenon does not occur and the visibility of the player's visibility of the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is different from the effect image. It can be said that it is not affected by the display.

When the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 11-49 (g6), as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, when a big hit (10R probability variable big hit) occurs, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. Note that the right-handed display lighting command (FD system command) is not transmitted because the right-handed promotion effect has already been executed. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-50 (h1) and (h2) progresses with the passage of time rather than being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-50(h1), as a fanfare effect, an image (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yah! Also, a sound congratulating a big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting mode for congratulating a big win. On the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-50(h2), after the fanfare effect is started, the image display device 5 displays a name image (character image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!" , a sound corresponding to the start of the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to correspond to the start of the big win. In addition, in the case of consecutive wins with the special figure 2 hit, since the big right hitting promotion effect has already been executed at the time of the special figure 1 win, the big right hitting promotion effect is not executed again. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and further , the frame lamp does not light up in a mode corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect in the 1Rth.

As shown in FIG. 11-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, the background image corresponding to the round effect is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the upper right continues. , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

Thereafter, although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIGS. 11-40 to 11-46, various effects such as V notice effect, aim for V effect, and V prize are executed during the round, and when the jackpot round ends soon. , ending effects are executed as shown in FIGS. 11-46 and 11-47. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-48, it is again controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state. In this series of games, on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed, and a right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern Each of the right-handed indicators 075F055 of the unit 075F050 continues to light up. Eventually, when the variable probability state after the jackpot game state ends without the occurrence of a jackpot and the state is controlled to the normal state, a right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 103 The CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right hitting display part 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Each of the parts 075F055 is turned off. As a result, the player hits to the left again in the normal state.

[Aspect of performance of pachinko game machine 1 when power is restored]
FIG. 11-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovery from power failure during the fanfare effect due to winning one special figure. 11-51, as shown in FIG. 11-20, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during fanfare production and then the power supply is restored. .

As shown in FIG. 11-51, an image (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!") for congratulating a big hit is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 11). -24 (c1) state), a state in which a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (in this example, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (Fig. 11-24 (c2) state), a state in which only the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-28 (c14)), and an arrow image in the large right-handed promotion performance together with the arrow image “Right-handed! !” is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-31 (c23)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. After that, when the power is turned on, a character image of "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a large winning opening open designation command (A101 command) from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command) is received, the large winning opening open designation. Based on the command (A101 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 1R as shown in FIG. 11-39(e1). In addition, an image congratulating a big hit (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!"), a name image indicating the name of the big win gaming state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS!!"). character image), the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect, and the character image of "Right-handed!"

In this way, even if power failure occurs before the large right-hand promotion effect is executed or until the large right-hand promotion effect is completed, the small right-hand promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on after that. Therefore, it is possible to at least encourage the player to hit the ball to the right immediately after the power failure, and it is not possible to enter the game ball into the main prize hole if the player forgets to hit the ball to the right. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player the disadvantage of

FIG. 11-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure during one round of the jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. 11-52, as shown in FIG. 11-20, assume power interruption 2 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 1R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 11-52, in the state where the image corresponding to the effect in 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 2R as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption. If prize balls are obtained during subsequent rounds, points may be added starting from 0 points again, such as adding 10 points for every 10 balls obtained. It should be noted that the point image is not limited to being displayed at 0pt after recovery from power failure, and the point may not be recognized by a predetermined image such as "??"

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done.

FIG. 11-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the electricity is restored during the round after one round of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 11-53 is the power interruption 3 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 11-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 11-53, when an image corresponding to an effect between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of (e4) in FIG. 11-40), when power failure occurs, After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 2R as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 11-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure during two rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. As shown in FIG. 11-54, as shown in FIG. 11-20, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 2R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 11-54, in the state where the image corresponding to the V probability variation suggestive effect in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-41 (e7)), when power failure occurs, the image After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V advance notice effect shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120, effect control. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), to execute the V notice effect as shown in Fig. 11-42 (e10). can also be configured to

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done.

FIG. 11-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure between the rounds after two rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 11-55 is the power interruption 5 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 2R, and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 11-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 11-55, in the state where the image corresponding to the round after 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-42 (e9)), when power failure occurs, the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V advance notice effect shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120, effect control. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), to execute the V notice effect as shown in Fig. 11-42 (e10). can also be configured to

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 11-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine in the case of recovery from power failure between rounds after 3 rounds of the big win at the time of winning 1 special figure. As shown in FIG. 11-56, the power interruption 6 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off during the round after the 3R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 11-56, in the state where the image corresponding to the round after the 3R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-43 (e13)), when power failure occurs, the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A104 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A104 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image during 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption. Also, since the stored data about the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 11-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120, performance control. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), executes the effect of aiming at V as shown in FIG. 11-44 (e14). It can also be configured as

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as being unable to enter the game ball into the V big winning opening in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can.

FIG. 11-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the four rounds of the jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. 11-57, as shown in FIG. 11-21, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 4R, and then power interruption 7 is assumed when the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 11-57, the state where the image corresponding to the effect of aiming for the V in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-44 (e15)), or the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-44 (e16)), if the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the power is turned on to display "Restoring...". is displayed on the image display device 5 .

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A105 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 5R as shown in FIG. 11-45 (e19). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done. Furthermore, as in 4R, when a power failure occurs while the V is aimed and the small right hitting promotion effect is being executed, and as shown in FIG. In the case where power is cut off while the right-handed promotion effect is being executed, both of them are common to each other, and after returning from the power failure, aim for V and the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, while the small right-handed promotion effect is not executed. is minimally performed. Therefore, in any situation, it is possible to at least prompt the player to hit to the right immediately after recovery from the power failure in a manner common to all situations.

FIG. 11-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the mode of presentation of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure between the rounds after four rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 11-58 is the power interruption 8 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 4R, and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 11-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 11-58, when power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-45 (e18)) between rounds after 4R. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 11-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during the final round of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. 11-59, as shown in FIG. 11-21, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 5R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 11-59, the state in which the image corresponding to the effect during the round in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state in FIG. 11-46 (e20)), or the state after the end of 5R (FIG. 11 -46 (e21)), the image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and then the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command), it responds to the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). Based on this, the image display device 5 is caused to display an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 11-46 (f1).

In this way, even if power is cut off during the final round of the big win, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that. It is possible to encourage hitting to the right and to prevent forgetting to hit to the right as much as possible.

FIG. 11-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during the ending effect at the time of winning one special figure. 11-60, as shown in FIG. 11-21, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during the ending effect and then the power supply is restored. .

As shown in FIG. 11-60, the state in which the image for selecting the stage in the probability changing state after the jackpot game state among the ending effects is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-46 (f1)), the character A state in which a name image indicating the name of the variable probability state is displayed together with the image on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-47 (f2)), showing an image corresponding to the immersion suppression notification effect and the result of the game in the jackpot game state. A game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-47 (f3)), and a forget-to-take prevention image for preventing the player from forgetting to take a card is displayed on the image display device 5. If a power failure occurs in any of the displayed states (the state of (f4) in FIG. 11-47), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, and then the power is turned on to display the character image "Restoring...". is displayed on the image display device 5 .

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, if there is a reserved memory number, the effect control CPU 120 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 system command, C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a symbol variation designation command (8D system command) from the CPU 103 , display result designation command (8C series command) and variation pattern designation command (81 series command) are received, and when these commands are received, reserved storage number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), Based on the background designation command (95 series command), pattern variation designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and variation pattern designation command (81 series command), Figure 11-48 (g1) The image display device 5 is caused to display a performance image corresponding to such a variation of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory number, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and when these commands are received, the background Based on the specified command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demonstration specified command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored while the initial pattern (in this example, "123" as the decorative pattern and the small pattern) is stopped. .

In this way, even if the power is cut off during the ending, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible, such as not being able to enter the second start winning port in a probability variable state after a big win game state due to forgetting to hit to the right. be able to.

[Main Effects Obtained by Characteristic Portion 075F]
The technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the characterizing portion 075F described above are individually listed below.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)), and the second guidance display. A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to FIG. 11-38 (c26) and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect),
After that, while the first guidance display is ended, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. On the other hand, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect),
After that, while the game medium cannot enter the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, aim at V as shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13). The part where the image display corresponding to the production is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion production is continued),
After that, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued even after the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area becomes the state in which the game medium can enter the specific area (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-44 (e15), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are continued),
After that, when the game medium enters the specific area, the second guidance display is continued while the third guidance display is ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (e16), aim for V While the image display corresponding to
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and an image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect during the display), and during the time the second guide display and the third guide display are performed (for example, shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15)). (While the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are being performed), the power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." is displayed after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 11-51 and 11-57). The part where the character image of and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

(1-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to FIG. 11-38 (c26) and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect),
After that, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 11-38 (d1), (d2 ), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated, while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion performance is continued),
After that, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 11-43 As shown in (e13), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim V effect is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, FIG. 11-44 ( As shown in e15), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim for the V effect and the image display corresponding to the suggestive effect of hitting the small right are continued),
After that, in conjunction with the entry of the game medium into the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, V as shown in FIG. 11-44 (e16)). While ending the image display corresponding to the aiming effect, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and an image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect When power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure while the display is being performed, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15)) During the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-hand hitting effect, the power failure occurs and the power is recovered from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after power-on as shown in FIGS. 11-51 and 11-57, "Restoring..." The part where the character image of and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

(1-3) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to FIG. 11-38 (c26) and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect),
After that, by receiving a 1R opening command (for example, a command for specifying during the opening of a large winning opening (A101 command), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 11-38 As shown in (d1) and (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect is continued),
After that, by receiving a command after the 3R is completed (for example, a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning hole), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 11-43 As shown in (e13), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim V effect is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion effect is continued),
After that, by receiving a 4R opening command (for example, a command for specifying during the opening of a large winning opening (A104 command), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, in FIG. 11-44 (e15) As shown, the part where the image display corresponding to the Aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are continued),
After that, by receiving a V passage command (for example, a probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 11-44 As shown in (e16), the part where the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is finished, while the image display corresponding to the "Short right hit suggesting effect" is continued),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (c23), the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect during the display), and during the time the second guide display and the third guide display are performed (for example, shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15)). (While the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are being performed), the power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." is displayed after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 11-51 and 11-57). The part where the character image of and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

Specifically, during execution of the fanfare effect, the player is encouraged to hit right in subsequent games by executing a large right-handed promotion effect and a small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize right-handed promotion. It is possible to prevent the player from appealing to the player for excessive hitting to the right by surely recognizing it, and then ending the large right-handed promotion performance while continuing the small right-handed promotion performance as it is. In addition, the effect of aiming for the V to aim at the V big prize mouth is executed from the time when the V big prize mouth is still closed, and by continuing as it is after the V big prize mouth is opened, the V To appeal to a player the importance of aiming at the big winning hole and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. In addition, after the V prize is generated and the V big prize opening is closed, the effect of aiming for the V is terminated, thereby preventing unnecessary promotion notification from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-described flow, since the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed, the player is instructed to always hit right-handed even after the V prize is generated from before the V big prize opening is opened. can be encouraged. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right. Also, when a power failure occurs during the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect and the power is restored from the power failure, it corresponds to the aim V effect. When the power failure occurs while the image display and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are being performed and the power is restored, after the power is turned on, the character image of "Restoring ..." and the small Since the image of the right-handed promotion performance is displayed, the player can be urged to continue to right-handed in the subsequent game even if the power failure occurs.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process for executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120),
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 ( c1) image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the first guidance display and the Performing the second guidance display (for example, image display corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect and image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-38 (c26)),
During the period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (e1) to 11-46 (e21) The part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued while the image display corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect is not performed during the round),
In the special state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after the big hit as shown in FIGS. 11-48 and 11-49 The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect in the variable state),
The second guidance display is not affected by background image switching display (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 11-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fading in and fading out),
The second guide display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect) (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect as shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5)). The part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by).

Specifically, during execution of the fanfare effect, the player is encouraged to hit right in subsequent games by executing a large right-handed promotion effect and a small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize right-handed promotion. To prevent a player from appealing to a player for excessive hitting to the right by surely recognizing it and continuing the small right-handed promotion performance while ending the large right-handed promotion performance during the subsequent big winning round. can be done. Further, the player can be urged to always hit to the right by continuously executing the small right-hand hitting promotion effect even in the variable probability state or the time-saving state after the end of the big win game state. Furthermore, after the occurrence of the big hit, the switching display (fade-out, fade-in, etc.) performed when switching to the big-hit round after the fanfare production is executed does not affect the small right-hand hitting promotion effect, and the big-hit game state is not affected. Since the small right-hand hitting promotion performance is not affected by the image display by the group notice performance performed in the variable probability state or the time-saving state after finishing, the player can always be urged to hit right. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed hitting effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 11-25 to 11- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. In conjunction with this, the frame lamps are lit in an arch from the left side to the right side twice),
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among a plurality of times of guidance light emission (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (c26) to 11-33 (c29), the second time A portion that does not output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion production when the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion production),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, after the start of the big hit round as shown in FIG. The part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
In a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. When it becomes, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right hitting promotion effect part that does not output sound in a certain way).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the lighting position of the lamp by the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hitting. can be encouraged to Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right. Second time), when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so the sound during the big win round that is output after the execution of the large right-handed promotion performance is performed. A player can smoothly hear the BGM during the big winning round without being affected by the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting against the BGM. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked thereto is not output, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized mode. can be prevented from feeling troublesome. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 11-25 to 11- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. In conjunction with this, the frame lamps are lit in an arch from the left side to the right side twice),
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among a plurality of times of guidance light emission (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (c26) to 11-33 (c29), the second time A portion that does not output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion production when the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion production),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, after the start of the big hit round as shown in FIG. The part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
The guidance means, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display When the specific display result is obtained, the guide light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the frame lamp is a large right-handed promotion effect The part that does not light up in a manner according to the condition).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the lighting position of the lamp by the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hitting. can be encouraged to Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right. Second time), when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so the sound during the big win round that is output after the execution of the large right-handed promotion performance is performed. A player can smoothly hear the BGM during the big winning round without being affected by the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting against the BGM. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed as in , and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 11-25 to 11- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means performs the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance display after turning off the light emission means (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the frame lamp is lit in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the display of the image corresponding to the promotion effect),
The sound output means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission (for example, FIG. 11-25 (c4) to FIG. As shown in 11-32 (c24), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion performance, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance),
Thereafter, in a state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When a result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R will be used to promote a large right-handed hit. part that does not output sound in a corresponding manner).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. Also, during the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting position of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so it is easier to understand and effective. The player can be urged to hit right. Furthermore, when the frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right, so that the player is urged to hit to the right by the sound as well. can be done. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked thereto is not output, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized mode. can be prevented from feeling troublesome. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 11-25 to 11- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, the image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guiding means are
After turning off the light emitting means, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. The part that lights up the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display),
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the frame lamp corresponds to the large right-handed promotion effect part that does not light up in the mode).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. Also, during the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting position of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so it is easier to understand and effective. The player can be urged to hit right. Furthermore, when the frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right, so that the player is urged to hit to the right by the sound as well. can be done. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed as in , and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(5) The second guidance display is displayed in a manner that is emphasized more than the name display of the advantageous state that is part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-hand hitting promotion effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 to 11-33 has a larger character image than the display of the name image in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. In addition, characters appear step by step, the execution time is long, and they are displayed in an emphasized manner. As a result, it is possible to emphasize to the player that he should hit to the right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission,
Not outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the midway guide light emission among the guide light emission of a plurality of times,
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the guidance light emission for a plurality of times.

Specifically, among a plurality of right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps, sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotional effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, but the second right-handed promotion is output. As for the subsequent right-handed promotion, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. In addition, the sound is not output in conjunction with the promotion of the second and subsequent right strokes. In other words, the sound data for promoting the right-handed stroke includes only the sound data associated with the first right-handed promotion. Thus, the BGM during the big winning round is smoothly delivered to the player without being affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting to the BGM during the big winning round output after the execution of the large right-hand hitting promotion performance. can be heard.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission,
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the midway guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission,
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the guidance light emission for a plurality of times.

Specifically, among a plurality of right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps, sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion. Sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the promotion of hitting to the right, but the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R for the final right-handed promotion. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are interlocked with the first and second right-handed promotions based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. The sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of the third right stroke, and the sound is not output. In other words, the sound data for right-handed promotion effect includes only sound data associated with each of the first and second right-handed promotions. It should be noted that the sound data includes only sound data linked to promoting right-handed hitting for one time, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute two loops of the sound data linked to promoting right-handed hitting for one time. . Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data interlocked with promoting right-handed hitting twice, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute the sound data interlocked with promoting right-handed hitting twice. . Thus, the BGM during the big winning round is smoothly delivered to the player without being affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting to the BGM during the big winning round output after the execution of the large right-hand hitting promotion performance. can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and after turning off all of the plurality of lamps, emits the guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-25 (c3)). As shown in , after all the lamps of the frame lamp are turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner according to the large right hitting promotion effect).

Specifically, after all the lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion performance, so that the player is urged to hit right in an easy-to-understand and effective manner. can be done.

(9) the light emitting means emits guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display based on data defined by a lighting data table;
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIG. 11-34) that defines the execution time of the guidance light emission, and a child table (for example, , child tables shown in FIGS. 11-35) and corresponding grandchild tables (for example, child tables shown in FIGS. 11-36 and 11-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamps 9 including the frame lamps refer to the parent table to specify the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect, and refer to the child table to select the grandchild table in which the lighting data is defined. Lighting/blinking/extinguishing is performed by specifying and referring to the grandchild table. As a result, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently lit in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) Of the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not emit guidance light is not defined as the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are turned off without being used in the big right hitting promotion effect, so a grandchild table is provided. do not have. As a result, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guiding means performs the guiding light emission by sequentially moving the light emitting locations of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, FIGS. 11-25 to 11- 33, the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 to 11-33, each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area, thereby executing a large right-handed promotion effect. By doing so, it is possible to urge the player to hit to the right in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guiding means emits the guiding light while changing the light emission color of the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights the frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp executes a large right-hand hitting promotion effect while lighting in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to hit right.

(13) The second guide display is not affected by the switching display by fade-in and fade-out as the switching display of the background image performed in relation to the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 11-38 (d1) 11-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fading in and fading out).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-38(d1) to 11-39(d4), the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is switching of the background image by fading in and out when switching from the fanfare effect to the big win round. It continues without being affected by the display. As a result, even if the fanfare effect is switched to the jackpot round by switching display of the background image, the player can be urged to continue hitting to the right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the advance notice effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, FIG. 11 -49 (g5), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the image display by the group notice effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5), the small right hitting promotion effect influences the display in the notice effect suggesting that a big hit will occur in the probability variable state after the end of the big win advantageous state. continue without As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the notice effect, the arrow image and the character image in the small right hitting promotion effect will continue to be displayed without impeding visibility. The player can be urged to hit right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2)). Thus, in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and the frame lamp is in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production. part that does not light up).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, a mode according to the large right hitting promotion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the first hit. , and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the promotion of hitting to the right in a manner that is frequently emphasized.

[Modified example of characteristic part 075F]
A modification of the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F described above will be described.

(About turning off the light before the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-25(c3), after all the lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. , not all lamps are turned off, and some lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) that lights up first in the big right hitting promotion effect may be lit. By doing so, it is possible to show well the connection when the frame lamps are subsequently turned on in a mode corresponding to the promotion effect of hitting to the right.

(About the switching display during the jackpot round)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (d1) to 11-39 (d4), as a switching display during the big win round, fade-in and fade-out are performed when switching from the fanfare effect to the big win round. Although the execution of the switching display of the background image has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a presentation effect such as a white-out inserting a pure white screen or a blackout inserting a pitch-black screen between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round may be used.

Also, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (music) may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen may be switched.

Further, as the switching display during the big win round, a mode selection screen for selecting the performance mode may be displayed, and the background image may be switched to the mode corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen.

In any case, even if a special switching display is performed during the big winning round, it is sufficient that the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is not affected.

(Regarding the display of the effect image in the probability variable state after the jackpot game ball state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5), as the display of the effect image in the probability changing state after the big hit game ball state, the image display by the group notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the variable probability state after the state of the jackpot game ball, a white-out effect in which a pure white screen is inserted during the ready-to-win effect, or a black-out effect in which a pure black screen is inserted may be used. It may be possible to use the effect of pseudo continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or the visibility of the decorative pattern is difficult by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. It is also possible to use a presentation effect that makes the In any case, even if a special effect display is performed in the variable probability state after the big hit game ball state, the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect should be unaffected.

(About aiming for V)
In this embodiment, as the specific area, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified. As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V grand prize opening was displayed. However, not limited to this, the image display in the Aim for V effect, which is the third guidance display using the image display related to the specific area, is not limited to pointing to the V big prize opening itself, but to the vicinity of the V big prize opening. Alternatively, it may refer to a path leading to the V big prize winning opening, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V big winning opening located on the upstream side of the V big winning opening.

(Regarding the promotion of hitting the right hand)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-25(c4) to 11-31(c23), the graphic image of the arrow appears first, and then the character image of "Right shot!" However, it is not limited to this. For example, the character image "Right shot!" may appear first, and then the graphic image of the arrow may appear. Further, the image display of the large right hitting promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display of the small right hitting promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display. may consist of only an arrow image or only a character image.

(About favorable conditions)
In this embodiment, the period shown in FIGS. 11-24 (c1) to 11-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 11-20 to t16 in FIG. ) was exemplified, but it is not limited to this. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" is the period excluding the fanfare production period, that is, the period shown in FIGS. period until t16). Further, the fanfare effect and the big right hitting promotion effect may be executed during a period (symbol confirmation period) during which the symbol for the occurrence of the big hit is confirmed.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of the first hit)
In this embodiment, in the case of a big hit with one special figure, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and a frame lamp is in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production. However, it is not limited to this. For example, depending on the type of jackpot in one special figure, the mode of the large right hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be varied. For example, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. is not output, and if the big hit in the special figure 1 is a variable hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion production. You may output a sound in a form. In addition, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production. may not be output.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of consecutive chan per special figure 2)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp does not light up in a mode corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, while the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the hard hitting to the right promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a manner corresponding to the hard hitting to the right promotion effect.

In addition, according to the type of consecutive chan per special figure 2, the aspect of the large right hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be changed. For example, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. is not output, and if the hit of the hit in the special figure 2 is a probability variable hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting the right side, and the speakers 8L, 8R to the promotion of hitting the right side. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. In addition, when the consecutive wins in the special figure 2 hits are normal jackpots, the frame lamps are not lit in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion performance, and the loudspeakers 8L and 8R correspond to the large right-handed promotion performance. You can choose not to output sound with . If the consecutive chan per special figure 2 is a hit, unlike the first hit per special figure 1, there is a special mode (for example, gold, seven colors, etc.) ), or a sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a special manner corresponding to the promotion effect of hitting to the right. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, a large right hitting promotion effect may be executed in a special mode (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit with the special figure 1. .

(About the third guide display)
In this embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display related to the specific area, the image pointing to the V big prize opening during the jackpot round of the probability variable jackpot is exemplified, but it is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, display an image prompting the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the second start winning hole, or display a variable winning ball. Displaying an image prompting the player to fire a game ball aiming at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) may be applied. For example, after the ending effect is completed, the effect control CPU 120 sends from the CPU 103 a pending memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a symbol variation designation command (8D system command), a display result Based on the receipt of the specified command (8C system command) and the variation pattern specification command (81 system command), along with the arrow image pointing to the second start winning opening and the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), "Aim! ” may be displayed on the image display device 5 . Even if such an image display is performed, the graphic and character images in the small right hitting promotion effect should be continuously displayed.

(Regarding the control of the time saving state by displaying the lost pattern)
In each characteristic portion and modification described above, for the transition to the time saving state (high base state), the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 075F007A always operate via the big hit state and the small hit state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device You may make it transfer to a time saving state (high base state), without operating 075F007A.

In addition, as the time saving pattern described above, these time saving patterns may be part of the losing pattern or may be part of the small winning pattern.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a random number dedicated to the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processing, or the lottery random number of the losing pattern or the big hit pattern. A lottery random number, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for judging a big win lottery, a lottery random number for a falling lottery, or the like may be used for the lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with symbols displayed as other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a losing symbol. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning pattern to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different probabilities between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Also, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing time-saving symbols, even if a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start opening (first start winning opening, 2nd starting prize opening) is acceptable.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a special random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the lottery of the time-saving design is a small hit design. When a random number is used, a specific small hit pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time saving area may be regarded as winning of the time saving pattern.

In addition, when the time-saving design lottery is performed using a structure, when the small winning design uses the time-saving design together, the variable display number of time-saving state (time-saving number of times) does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area passes. to

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, when using random numbers for time-saving patterns, a specific losing pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when using a big hit pattern random number for lottery of time-saving patterns, it is specified. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

Further, the judgment timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be executed at the timing after the big hit judgment. In addition, the time-saving design lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. In addition, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Moreover, when the number of times of shortening of working hours differs according to the shortening of working hours pattern, it is possible to change the sorting lottery of the shortening of working hours pattern between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, a derivation lottery for time saving end patterns (time saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end patterns are derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the jackpot patterns are derived and displayed. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

Further, in the case of lottery using structures, the timing of control to the time-saving state is the timing of the end of the operation of the structure in the game state (for example, small win state) in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a game machine controlled to a high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit (so-called specified number-of-times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high-probability low-base state when the amusement center is opened. , and after the high-probability low-base state is executed a specified number of times of variable display and ends, control may be performed to the time-saving state.

In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

In the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F, in order to control the game state to the time saving state, it was always via the jackpot game state, so to encourage the player to hit right in the time saving state. It is possible to perform the large right hitting promotion performance and the small right hitting promotion performance during the fanfare performance executed when the big hit occurs. However, if the above-described losing pattern is used as a time saving pattern, the game state is controlled to a time saving state without going through the big hit game state. In the period from when the pattern is displayed to when it is controlled to the time saving state, it is necessary to secure time for executing the large right hitting promotion performance and the small right hitting promotion performance. Therefore, the large right hitting promotion effect and the small right hitting promotion effect may be executed by the method described below.

For example, if the pattern confirmation time until the fluctuation of the losing pattern that is not the time saving pattern stops is set to 0.5 seconds, the pattern fixing time until the losing pattern that is the time saving pattern stops is set to 30 seconds longer than that. , You may perform the time-saving fanfare production which alert|reports the start of control of a time-saving state in the meantime. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C series command), the CPU 103 is different from the display result specification command indicating normal loss variation without time saving as a command for specifying loss, and time saving is given. A display result specifying command indicating is prepared, and depending on whether or not the time saving pattern is a loss variation, both commands may be used properly and an effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol determination time to 0.5 seconds when a display result designation command indicating a normal loss variation is received, and the symbol determination time when a display result designation command indicating a time-saving loss variation is received. should be set to 30 seconds.

The effect control CPU 120 displays a name image indicating the name of the time saving state (for example, "time saving RUSH") on the image display device 5 in 30 seconds of the design confirmation time, and controls the time saving state from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output in a corresponding mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a mode corresponding to the control of the time saving state. Such a part of the time-saving fanfare effect can correspond to a part of the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 11-24(c2).

Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1), before the name image (“time saving RUSH”) by this time saving fanfare production is displayed, an image that congratulates the time saving state (for example, “O Happy!” character image) is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound congratulating the time saving state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and lighting congratulates the time saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed so as to change the mode. In addition, as a small right hitting promotion effect, a small right hitting promotion effect is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (an arrow indicating the right direction) and characters (characters of "right hitting") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5, A right-handed hitting sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 may be changed to a mode (lighting) that prompts right-handed hitting. It should be noted that the image in the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 start and end at the same timing. That is, both are designed to encourage the player to hit right over the same period of time.

After that, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 11-24 (c2), while the name image (“time saving RUSH”) is displayed by the time saving fanfare production, the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously executed, and then FIG. 11-25 (c3) Once the game effect lamp 9 is turned off in the same way as in the example shown in FIG. 11-25 (c4) to FIG. You may perform a performance. During this time, the small right hitting promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right hitting promotion effect, the game state may be controlled to the time saving state similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 11-48 to 11-50, and the small right hitting promotion effect may be continued.

In this way, even if it is controlled to the time saving state triggered by the lost pattern, by securing more pattern confirmation time than the pattern confirmation time in the lost pattern that is not the time saving pattern, the design confirmation time is large. A hitting promotion effect and a small right hitting promotion effect can be executed.

In addition, in the case of being controlled to the time saving state triggered by the lost pattern, as described above, not only those that execute the large right hitting promotion effect and the small right hitting promotion effect using the pattern fixed time as described above, but the loss of the time saving grant If there is a reserved memory corresponding to the loss for performing the next game (fluctuation) of the game whose pattern has been confirmed, in the next game (fluctuation), the short-time fanfare production is executed, and the large right hitting promotion production and small right A hitting promotion effect may be executed. Specifically, if the next game (fluctuation) after the game in which the losing pattern has been confirmed is a losing fluctuation, instead of performing a production that makes you expect a hit such as a reach production or a notice production, a time-saving fanfare production will be performed instead. Along with the execution, a large right hitting promotion effect and a small right hitting promotion effect may be executed. However, if the next game (fluctuation) after the game in which the losing pattern is determined is a big win, then the fanfare effect as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory for performing the next game (variation) of the game in which the lost pattern of the time saving grant is confirmed, the time saving fanfare production is executed with the pattern not changed, and the large right hitting promotion production and small A right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, the CPU 103 does not transmit the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in order to prevent the performance of the customer waiting demonstration from being executed and hindering the time saving fanfare performance. . Alternatively, even if a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) is received from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a time saving fanfare effect without executing the customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic portions)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Frame for game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decoration symbol display area 6A Winning ball device , 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12 performance control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay Substrate, 21 gate switch, 22A first start switch, 22B second start switch, 23 count switch, 25A first hold indicator, 25B second hold display, 25C normal figure hold display, 30 batting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 81, 82 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 Random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display controller.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium according to a player's operation;
sound output means;
display means;
light emitting means;
and a production execution means capable of executing production,
The light emitting means includes specific light emitting means and predetermined light emitting means,
The display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area,
The production executing means is
A specific effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
Guidance display that uses image display to urge the player to shoot a game medium toward the second area of the first area and the second area;
guidance light emission to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area by moving the light emission location of the specific light emission means;
The specific production is
A production animation is displayed on the display means, a production sound is output by the sound output means, and the predetermined light emission means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period, in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is notified as a result of the production. configured,
The production executing means is
The effect moving image can be displayed in the first display area,
In the second display area, it is possible to display information display related to the game,
In the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed in the first display area,
In the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
In the third period,
When an advantageous mode is notified as a result of the effect, the first display area and the second display area are used without displaying the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period. It is possible to notify the effect result of the advantageous mode,
When notifying a disadvantageous aspect as the effect result, the effect result of the disadvantageous aspect is notified using the first display area while the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period is displayed. is possible and
In both the first period and the second period, the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting means can be changed, and in the second period, the predetermined light emission is performed at an interval shorter than that in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode of the means,
The mode of information display is common in the first period and the second period,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The production executing means is
The first guide display and the second guide display are performed when the start effect related to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, and in the subsequent period, the first guide display is terminated while the second guide display is performed. Display guidance,
performing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed;
After turning off the specific light emitting means, performing the guidance light when performing the first guidance display,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images